Table of Contents

Section 19
Push Buttons and Operator Interface
Selection Guide 19-2

Push Buttons and Pilot Lights 19-2

XVL Compact Light Control Stations 19-3
Pendant Stations 19-4
Tower Lights and Beacons 19-5
22 and 30 mm Most Common Complete Operators 19-8

XB4–XB5 Common Operators, Complete with Contact Blocks 19-8

Type J Compact Light 16 mm XB6
Type K, SK Common Operators, Complete with Contact Blocks 19-9
22 mm Push Buttons 19-10

XB4 Complete Devices 19-10

XB5 Complete Devices 19-24
XB5R Plastic and XB4R Metal Wireless, Batteryless Push Buttons 19-41
22 mm XB4 122 mm XB5
XB7 Push Buttons 19-44
30 mm Push Buttons 19-47

16 mm Push Buttons 19-66

XB6 Complete Devices 19-66

Rotary Cam Switches 19-68
XB5R Wireless, Batteryless XB5S Biometric Switch
Push Button Control Stations and Enclosures 19-72

XAL 22 mm Control Stations 19-72

XAP 22 mm Enclosures and Accessories 19-73
9001B Standard Duty Control Stations 19-74
30 mm Control Stations and Enclosures 19-75
30 mm Type K 30 mm Type SK 30 mm Type KX 30 mm Enclosures 19-76
Pendant Stations 19-78

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Wireless Remote Control System 19-78
Type BW Pendant Stations 19-81
XAC Standard Duty Pistol Grips, Enclosures, Contact Blocks 19-82

INTERFACE
Type XACA Worksheet 19-83
Tower Lights and Beacons 19-84
Type KY Enclosure Type B Wall Station
Signaling Units 19-89
Foot Switches 19-96

19
Pendant Stations Tower Lights

Type A Foot Switch Rotary Cam Switch

0100CT2401-SEC-19
© 2024 Schneider Electric 19-1
All Rights Reserved
 Selection Guide Push Buttons and Pilot Lights
Refer to Catalogs DIA5ED2121212EN*, DIA5ED2121213EN**, DIA5ED2120503EN***, and 9001CT1103****
www.se.com/us

Push Button Selection Guide

Family XB4 XB5 XB7 9001K 9001SK 9001KX

*22 mm Push Button **22 mm Push Button ***22mm Push Button ****30 mm Push Button ****30 mm Push Button ****30 mm Push Button
Type of Product (metal) (plastic) (plastic) (metal) (plastic) (metal, square)
Mounting Hole 31 mm 31 mm 31 mm
22.5 mm 22.5 mm 22.5 mm (1.22 in) (1.22 in) (1.22 in)
Diameter
UL Listed File E164353, UL Listed File E164353,
CCN NKCR CCN NKCR UL File E164353, CCN UL File E78403. CCN UL File E78403. CCN UL File E78403. CCN
UL Recognized File UL Recognized File NKCR NKCR NKCR NKCR
Approvals E164353. CCN NKCR2 E164353., CCN NKCR2
CSA File LR44087. CSA File LR44087. CSA File LR44087-122 CSA File LR25490. CSA File LR25490. CSA File LR25490.
Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03
CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked
RoHS Compliant RoHS Compliant RoHS Compliant RoHS Compliant RoHS Compliant RoHS Compliant
EN/IEC 60947-1,
EN/IEC 60947-5-1 for
push buttons, pilot
EN/IEC 60947-1, EN/IEC 60947-1, lights, illuminated push
EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-1, buttons and selector EN/IEC 60947-1 EN/IEC 60947-1 EN/IEC 60947-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4, EN/IEC 60947-5-4, switches
EN/IEC 60947-5-5 EN/IEC 60947-5-5 EN/IEC 60947-1,
EN/IEC 60947-5-1,
EN/IEC 60947-5-5,
EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/IEC 60204-1 and
EN/ISO 13850: 2006 EN/ISO 13850: 2006 EN/IEC 60204-1 and
(trigger action and (trigger action and EN/ISO 13850 for
mechanical latching mechanical latching Emergency Stop trigger EN/IEC60947-5-1 EN/IEC60947-5-1 EN/IEC60947-5-1
emergency stop push emergency stop push action push buttons
Conforming to buttons) button).
Standards EN/IEC 60364-5-53 EN/IEC 60364-5-53
(emergency switching of (emergency switching of
mechanical latching push mechanical latching push EN/IEC60947-5-4 EN/IEC60947-5-4 EN/IEC60947-5-4
buttons) buttons)
EN81-1 (emergency stop
trigger action and
— mechanical latching push
buttons with mechanical
state indicator)
JIS C 4520 JIS C 4520 JIS C 4520 and 852 JIS C 4520 and 852 JIS C 4520 and 852
UL 508 UL 508 UL 508 UL 508 UL 508 UL 508
CSA C22.2 No.14 CSA C22.-2 No.14 CSA C22 No.14 CSA C22.2 No.14 CSA C22.2 No.14 CSA C22.2 No.14
19

GOST GOST
CCC CCC CCC
GB 14048.5 for all XB7
range
IP65, IP69, IP69K IP65, IP69, IP69K IP54, IP65 IP65 IP65 IP66
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Degree of IP66 for booted IP66 for booted — — — —

Protection NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 12,
NEMA 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, 13 NEMA 3, 4, 12 NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13
13 12, 13 13
Operating
Temperature F° -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -13 to 158 (-25 to 70) -22 to 140 (-30 to 60) -22 to 140 (-30 to 60) -22 to 140 (-30 to 60)
(C°)
INTERFACE

Storage
Temperature F° -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70)
(C°)
Electric Shock
Class I Class I — Class II Class II Class II
Protection
Electrical
Consumption
24 Vac/Vdc: 18 mA 24 Vac/Vdc: 18 mA Illuminated Push
120 Vac: 14 mA 120 Vac: 14 mA Buttons:
24V - 18mA Incandescent and LED Incandescent and LED
120V - 12mA bulbs. bulbs.
LED 230V - 22mA For ratings, see For ratings, see Incandescent
240 Vac: 14 mA 240 Vac: 14 mA Pilot Lights Standard Light Modules, Standard Light Modules,
24V - 20mA page 19-63. page 19-63.
120V - 18mA
230V - 16mA
AC-15; B600 AC-14; D300
Ue = 600 Vac and le = 1.2 A AC-15; B600 Ue = 240 Vac and le =
Ue = 600 Vac and le = 1.2 A
Ue = 240 Vac and Ue = 240 Vac and le = 3 A 0.3A AC-15; A600 AC-15; A600 AC-15; A600
le = 3A Ue = 120 Vac and le = Continuous 10 A Continuous 10 A Continuous 10 A
Ue = 120 Vac and le = 6 A
Ue = 120 Vac and le = 6A Continuous 10 A 0.6A
Rated Continuous 10 A Continuous 4 A
Operational DC-13; Q600 DC-13; Q600 DC-13; Q600 DC-13; Q600 DC-13; Q600
Characteristics Ue = 600 Vdc and Ue = 600 Vdc and DC-13; R300 Ue = 600 Vdc and Ue = 600 Vdc and Ue = 600 Vdc and
le = 0.1 A le = 0.1 A Ue = 250 Vdc and le = le = 0.1 A le = 0.1 A le = 0.1 A
Ue = 250 Vdc and Ue = 250Vdc and 0.1A Ue = 250 Vdc and Ue = 250 Vdc and Ue = 250 Vdc and
le = 0.27 A le = 0.27 A Ue = 125 Vdc and le = le = 0.27 A le = 0.27 A le = 0.27 A
Ue = 125 Vdc and Ue = 125 Vdc and 0.22A Ue = 125 Vdc and Ue = 125 Vdc and Ue = 125 Vdc and
le = 0.55 A le = 0.55 A le = 0.55 A le = 0.55 A le = 0.55 A
Connection IP20 Fingersafe Screw or Spring Terminal
Type IP20 Fingersafe Screw Terminal
Screw Terminal: Spring Terminal: Screw and captive
clamp terminal
1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm²) min. 1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm²) min. connections Faston clip 1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm²) 1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm²) 1 x 24 AWG (0.2 2mm²)
2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm²) max. 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm²) max. connections (pilot lights) min. min. min.
Cable Size
2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm²) max. 2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm²) max. 2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm²) max 2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm²) 2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm²)
max max
Digest Location XB4, page 19-10 XB5, page 19-24 XB7, page 19-44 Type K, page 19-47 Type SK, page 19-55 KX, page

19-2
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Control Stations Selection Guide
Refer to Catalogs 9001CT1104
www.se.com/us

Control Station Selection Guide

Family XAL XAP 9001B

NEMA 1 NEMA 1
Surface Mounting Flush Mounting
9001BG•• 9001BF••
XAPA1100
XALD02

NEMA 4 NEMA 7 and 9

XAPA1104 9001BW•• 9001BR••
9001BG—plastic cover
XALD—Polycarbonate XAPA—glass filled polyester 9001BF—stainless steel
Type of Product/Material XALK—Polycarbonate XAPG—die cast zinc
9001BW—die cast zinc
XAPE—anodized aluminum 9001BR—cast aluminum
Number of holes 1 to 3 0 to 16 1 to 3
Type of Operators XB5 (22mm) XB5 (22mm) Built in
Available without Operators Yes Yes No
Available with Operators Yes No Yes
UL File E164353 UL File E164353 UL File E78403
CCN NKCR CCN NKCR CCN NKCR
Approvals
CSA File LR 44087 CSA File LR 44087 CSA File LR 25490
Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03
CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked
EN/IEC 60947-1, EN/IEC 60947-1, EN/IEC 60947-1,

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-1,
Conforming to Standards EN/IEC 60947-5-4, EN/IEC 60947-5-4, EN/IEC 60947-5-4,
JIS C 4520 JIS C 4520 JIS C 4520
UL 508 UL 508 UL 508
CSA C22.2 No.14 CSA C22.2 No.14 CSA C22.2 No.14

INTERFACE
9001BG - 1
1, 4, 4X, 13 XAPA - 4, 4X, 12, IP65 9001BF - 1
Degree of Protection IP65 XAPG - 4, 12, IP65
XAPE - 4, 4X, 12, IP65 9001BW - 4
IP66 - Booted 9001BR - 7, 9
Operating Temperature F° (C°) -13 to 158 (-25 to 70) -13 to 158 (-25 to 70)
Storage Temperature F° (C°) -40 to 158 (-10 to 70) -40 to 158 (-10 to 70)
XAPA—undrilled 9001BG—1/2 &3/4 knockout
Cable Entry No. 13 knock out XAPG—Tapped 3/4NPT 9001BF—N/A
XAPE—flush mount (n/a) 9001BW—1/2-14NPT
9001BR—1/2-14NPT
Digest Location XAL, page 19-72 XAP, page 19-72 9001B, page 19-74

19

19-3
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Selection Guide Pendant Stations
Refer to Catalogs DIA5ED2140103EN* and 9001CT1001**
www.se.com/us

Pendant Station Selection Guide

Family ZAR ZAR
eXL Hoist Compact 9001BW XACA2 XACA0
Pocket Remote

Type of Product *Wireless Pendant *Wireless Remote **2-Button Pendant **2-Button Pistol Grip Pendant **General Purpose Pendant
Number of operators 6 motion, 2 auxilliary 3, 4, 6, 8, and 10 2 2 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12
UL File E78403 UL File E164353 UL File E164353 CNN NKCR
Approvals UL/CSA, CE, EAC UL, CE CNN NKCR CNN NKCR
CSA File LR 44087 Class
CSA File LR25490 CSA File LR 44087 Class 3211-03
Class 3211-03 3211-03
For receiver:
EN 300 328 V2.1.1: 2016-11 For receiver:
EN 301 489-1 V2.1.1: 2017-02 EN 300 328 V2.1.1: 2016-11
EN 301 489-17 V3.1.1: 2017- EN 301 489-1 V2.1.1: 2017-02
02 EN 301 489-17 V3.1.1: 2017- EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-1,
EN 60950-1:2006 + A11: 2009 02 EN/IEC 60204-32, EN/IEC 60204-32,
EN 50581: 2012 EN 60950-1:2006 + A11: 2009 EN/IEC 60947-5-5, and EN/IEC 60947-5-5, and
EN ISO 13849-1:2016 EN 50581: 2012 EN/ISO 13850 (for versions EN/ISO 13850 (for versions
Conforming to For transmitter: For transmitter: CE Marked with trigger action emergency with trigger action emergency
Standards stop) stop)
EN 300 440 V2.1.1: 2017-03 EN 300 440 V2.1.1: 2017-03
EN 301 489-1 V2.1.1: 2017-02 EN 301 489-1 V2.1.1: 2017-02 UL 508 UL 508
EN 301 489-3 V2.1.1: 2017-03 EN 301 489-3 V2.1.1: 2017-03 CSA C22-2 No. 14 CSA C22-2 No. 14
EN 60950-1:2006 + A11: 2009 EN 60950-1:2006 + A11: 2009 RoHS compliant RoHS compliant
+ A1: 2010 + A12: 2011 + A1: 2010 + A12: 2011
EN 62479: 2010 EN 62479: 2010
EN 50581: 2012 EN 50581: 2012
EN ISO 13849-1:2016
NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 5 NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 5
Degree of Protection Transmitter: IP65/NEMA 4, IP67 for transmitter and IP66 NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X IP65 IP65
Receiver: IP66 for receiver
IK08 IK08
Operating Temperature -4 to 131 (-20 to 55) -4…131 °F (-20…55 °C) -13 to 140 (-25 to 60) -13 to 140 (-25 to 60) -13 to 140 (-25 to 60)
F° (C°)
Storage Temperature F° -4 to 113 (-20 to 45) -4…113 °F (-20…45 °C) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70)
19

(C°)
Housing Material Polyurethane Polyurethane Polycarbonate / PET Polyester Yellow Polypropylene Yellow Polypropylene
Blend
AC-15: A600 AC-15: A600
— AC - B600 or Ue = 600V, le = 1.2A or Ue = 600V, le = 1.2A
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Rated Operational — or Ue = 240V, le = 3A or Ue = 240V, le = 3A

Characteristics [1] — DC-13: Q600 DC-13: Q600
— DC - P600 or Ue = 600V. le = 0.1A or Ue = 600V. le = 0.1A
or Ue = 250V, le = 0.27A or Ue = 250V, le = 0.27A
Thermal Current — — Continuous 5A Continuous 10A Continuous 10A
1/2 in. NPT 8–26 mm cable entry 8–26 mm cable entry
INTERFACE

Connection Type — — screw clamp terminals screw clamp terminals screw clamp terminals
Receiver: PVC torsion cable, Receiver: PVC torsion cable,
1 x 0.5 mm² (20AWG) min.
largest single wire Ø 0.21 largest single wire Ø 0.21 mm
Cable Size (0.008 in.), outer Ø 12.0 mm — 2 x 1.5 mm² (16AWG) max. 1 x 14 AWG (copper only)
mm/0.008 in., outer Ø 12.0 1 x 2.5 mm² (14AWG) max.
mm/0.47 in. (0.47 in.)
Digest Location XAR, page XAR, page Type BW, page 19-81 XAC, page 19-82 XAC, page 19-82

[1] OSHA Section 1910.179, Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc max.
19-4
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons Selection Guide
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

Tower Lights and Beacons Selection Guide (1 of 2)

Family XVB L XVB C

Type of Product Beacon Tower Light

Diameter 70mm 70mm
Features Product for Customer Configuration Product for Customer Configuration
UL File E164353 CCN NKCR UL File E164353 CCN NKCR
Approvals
CSA File LR 44087 Class 3211 03 CSA File LR 44087 Class 3211 03
CE Marked CE Marked
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Conforming to Standards
UL 508 UL 508
CSA 22.2 No 14 CSA 22.2 No 14
Degree of Protection IP65 IP65
Operating Temperature F° (C°) -13 to122 (-25 to 50) -13 to122 (-25 to 50)
Storage Temperature F° (C°) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70)
Light Source LED / Incandescent LED / Incandescent
Electrical Consumption
24 Vac/dc: < 30 mA 24 Vac/dc: < 30 mA
LED Steady
120–230 Vac: < 30 mA 120–230 Vac: < 30 mA
24 Vac/dc: < 40 mA 24 Vac/dc: < 40 mA
LED Flashing 120–230 Vac: < 15mA 120–230 Vac: < 15mA
with Buzzer
1 Hz (1 flash per second) 1 Hz (1 flash per second)
24 Vdc: 24 Vdc:
5 Joules unit < 430 mA; 10 J unit: < 850 mA 5 Joules unit < 430 mA; 10 J unit: < 850 mA
120 Vac: 120 Vac:

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Strobe (Energized) 5 Joules unit: < 130 mA; 10 J unit: < 260 mA 5 Joules unit: < 130 mA; 10 J unit: < 260 mA
230 Vac: 230 Vac:
5 Joules unit: < 105 mA; 10 J unit: < 210 mA 5 Joules unit: < 105 mA; 10 J unit: < 210 mA
1 Hz (1 flash per second) 1 Hz (1 flash per second)
12–48 Vac/dc: < 20 mA 12–48 Vac/dc: < 20 mA

INTERFACE
Audible Sounders 120–230 Vac: < 50 mA 120–230 Vac: < 50 mA
90 decibels at 1 meter 90 decibels at 1 meter
Connection Type Screw Clamp Screw Clamp
1 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm²) 1 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm²)
Cable Size
With Cable End With Cable End
Digest Location XVB 70 mm Beacons, page 19-84 XVB 70 mm Components, page 19-85

19

19-5
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Selection Guide Tower Lights and Beacons
Refer to Catalogs DIA5ED2130805EN*, DIA5ED2130407EN**, and 9001CT1002***
www.se.com/us

Tower Lights and Beacons Selection Guide (2 of 2)

Family XVC 4 XVC 6 XVC 1 XVU XVGU XVR XVS

Type of Product *Tower Light *Tower Light *Tower Light **Tower Light **Tower Light ***Rotating Beacon ***Siren and Electronic
Alarm
Diameter 40 mm 60 mm 100 mm 60mm 60mm 84/100/106/120/130 mm —
Adjustable Tones
XVS14BMW, 0 to 105
All devices are pre- decibels, 43 tones
Programmable LED assembled and pre-wired. XVS72BM••, 0 to 90
module with multiple Programmable with XVR12•••S includes decibels, 16 tones
Features All devices are pre-assembled and pre-wired colors, flashing, blinking, Magelis through USB buzzer: 50 to 90 decibels XVSV••••, 0 to 89/97dB, 6
and rotating XVR3•••S includes buzzer: channels, 63 messages,
70 to 90 decibels 256 sec
XVSV•••• Programmable
with software
UL Recognized UL Recognized UL Recognized
UL file: E164353 CCN : UL File E164353 CCN UL Recognized E164353 UL Recognized E164353
E164353 CNN E164353 CNN E164353 CNN
NKCR NKCR NKCR NKCR NKCR CNN NKCR CNN UCST
Approvals
CSA LR44087 CSA LR44087 CSA LR44087 CSA File : 225619 cUL File: E164353 CSA LR44087 CSA LR44087
Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03 CLASS : 3211-07 CCN: NKCR7 Class 3211-03 Class 3211-03
CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked CE Marked
EN61000-6-2 EN61000-6-2 EN61000-6-2 EN 60947-1 EN 61000-6-2 EN61000-6-2 ce
EN61000-6-3 EN61000-6-3 EN61000-6-3 EN 60947-5-1 EN61000-6-4 UKCA
EN61000-6-2, EN61000-6-
19

Conforming to
Standards — EN61000-6-4 EN61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2 — 3, EN60947-1, EN60947-5-
1
UL 508 UL 508 UL 508 UL508 UL508 UL 508 UL 508
CSA 22.2 CSA 22.2 CSA 22.2 CSA 22.2 No. 14
CSA C22.2 No.14 CSA C22.2 No.14 CSA 22.2 No. 14 (excluding XVSV)
No. 14 No. 14 No. 14
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

XVR08 - XVR13: IP23 /

Degree of IP55 / IP65 / IP66 / IP67
IP54 IP54 IP54 IP65 IP42 XVR3: IP23 / IP65 - NEMA IP53 / IP54 / IP65
Protection
4/4X - Up to 7.1gn
vibration resistance
Operating
INTERFACE

-13 to122 (-25 -13 to122 (-25 -13 to122 (-25 to -14 to 122 (-10 to 50) / (-20 -4 to 122 (-20 to 50) (-20 to
Temperature F° -13 to 122 (-25 to 50) 32 to 131 (0 to 55)
to 50) to 50) 50) to 50) 60 XVSV)
(C°)
Storage
-40 to 158 (-40 -40 to 158 (-40 -40 to 158 (-40 to -31 to 158 (-35 to 70) (-10
Temperature F° -13 to 150 (-25 to 65) -31 to 158 (-35 to 70) -31 to 158 (-35 to 70)
(C°) to 70) to 70) 70) to 55 XVSV)
Light Source LED LED LED LED LED LED —
Electrical Consumption Body unit ≤ 400mA 400mA
XVR08, XVR10, XVR12,
and XVR13 (without
buzzer)
24 V: 24 V:
1 unit = 40mA; 1 unit = 100mA; 12 Vac/dc: 360mA
Programmable with 24 Vac/dc: 180mA
LED Steady 2 unit = 80mA; 2 unit = 200mA;
3 unit = 120mA 3 unit = 300mA LED Units ≤ 50 mA Magelis through USB XVR3 (with-w/o buzzer) —
Rotating, Flashing,
4 unit = 160mA; 4 unit = 400mA; Blinking (10 modes)
5 unit = 200mA 5 unit = 500mA
12-24V DC: 3000mA
48V DC: 1000mA
100-230V AC: 500mA
XVR12 with buzzer:
**24 V: 24 V: 12 Vac/dc: 400 mA
1 unit = 90 mA; 1 unit = 150mA; 24 Vac/dc: 230 mA
2 unit = 130 mA; 2 unit = 250mA; 3 Hz (1 flash per 3 sec)
3 unit = 170 mA 3 unit = 350mA Programmable with XVR3 (with-w/o buzzer)
LED Flashing Buzzer ≤ 70 mA Flasher
4 unit = 210 mA; 4 unit = 450mA; Magelis through USB Rotating, Flashing, —
** with Buzzer and multi-color ≤ 70 mA Blinking (10 modes)
5 unit = 250 mA 5 unit = 550mA
0.7 to 3 Hz (1 flash per 0.7 to 3 3 to 3.5 Hz (1 flash 12-24V DC, 48V DC:
sec) per 3 to 3.5 sec) 3000mA
48V DC: 1000mA
100-230V AC: 500mA
Strobe
(Energized) — — — — — — —
XVS14BMW
70 to 85 70 to 85
decibels at 1 decibels at 1 60 to 85 decibels 12 Vdc: 350mA
at 1 meter — — — 24 Vdc: 400 mA
meter meter 105 decibels at 1 m
Audible
Sounders XVS72BM
12 Vdc: 280 mA
— — — — — — 24 Vdc: 190 mA
90 decibels at 1 m
XVSV7BBN

19-6
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons Selection Guide
Refer to Catalogs DIA5ED2130805EN*, DIA5ED2130407EN**, and 9001CT1002***
www.se.com/us
Family XVC 4 XVC 6 XVC 1 XVU XVGU XVR XVS
24 Vdc: 75mA - 89dB at
1m
XVSV9MBN
100 Vac: 100mA - 97dB at
1m
Pre-Wired, Pre-Wired, Pre-Wired, XVS14BMW
Color-Coded Color-Coded Color-Coded Pre-Wired, Color-Coded
Wires Wires Wires Pre-Wired Wires
cable length: cable length: cable length: USB power cable: - 300 cable length: cable length:
Connection 600mm XVC4•• 600mm XVC6•• 500mm XVC1••K mm/11.81 in. for tube 500mm XVR08••• 500mm XVS14
Type 900mm 850mm 500mm XVC1••SK Screw Clamp mounting - 400 mm/15.75 400mm XVR10•••
XVC4••K XVC6••K 550mm XVC6••5S in. for direct mounting 400mm XVR12•••
500mm 550mm 850mm 400mm XVR13••• XVS72BM••
XVC4••5S XVC6••5S XVC6••5SK 400mm XVR3••• Not Pre-Wired
850mm
XVC6••5SK
16 AWG (1.25 mm²)
22 AWG (0.33 22 AWG (0.33 22 AWG (0.33 XVR13•••
See each product data
Cable Size mm²) mm²) mm²) 22 - 16 AWG — 18 AWG (0.75 mm²) sheet
20 AWG (0.57 mm2)
XVR3•••
Digest Location XVC, page 19- XVC, page 19- XVC, page 19-87 XVU, page XVGU, page XVR, page 19-93 XVS, page 19-95
87 87
For Tower Lights catalog numbers:
first dot denotes voltage selection
second dot denotes color selection

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

19-7
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 and 30 mm Most Common Complete XB4–XB5 Common Operators, Complete
Operators with Contact Blocks
Refer to Catalogs DIA5ED2121212EN and DIA5ED2121213EN www.se.com/us

XB4–XB5 Common Operators

Table 19.1: BLACK—Start Push Buttons (flush head) Table 19.2: RED—Stop Push Buttons (extended head)
Operator Contact Operator Contact
Description Type Legend Plate Style Description Type Legend Plate
Style Block Block

XB4 Die Cast XB4 Die Cast

XB4BA21 ZBY2303 Chrome XB4BL42 ZBY2304
Chrome
1 N.O.
1 N.C.

XB5 Double XB5 Double

XB5AA21 ZBY2303 Insulated XB5AL42 ZBY2304
Insulated
1 N.O.
1 N.C.

Table 19.3: BLACK—Off-On Selector Switch Table 19.4: Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch
Operator Contact Operator Contact
Description Type Legend Plate Description Type Legend Plate
Style Block Style Block

XB4 Die Cast XB4 Die Cast

XB4BD21 ZBY2367 Chrome XB4BD33 ZBY2387
Chrome
1 N.O.
2 N.O.

XB5 Double XB5 Double

XB5AD21 ZBY2367 XB5AD33 ZBY2387
Insulated Insulated
1 N.O.
2 N.O.

Table 19.5: RED—120 Vac LED—On Pilot Light Table 19.6: GREEN—120 Vac LED—Off Pilot Light
Operator Contact Operator Contact
Description Type Legend Plate Description Type Legend Plate
Style Block Style Block

XB4 Die Cast 120 Vac XB4 Die Cast 120 Vac
XB4BVG4 ZBY2311 XB4BVG3 ZBY2312
Chrome Red LED Chrome Green LED

XB5 Double 120 Vac XB5 Double 120 Vac

XB5AVG4 ZBY2311 XB5AVG3 ZBY2312
Insulated Red LED Insulated Green LED
19

Table 19.7: RED—40 mm Mushroom Stop (Push-Pull) Table 19.8: RED—40 mm Mushroom Emergency Stop
Operator
Description Contact Type Legend Plate
(Trigger Action, Turn-to-Release)
Style Block Legend
Operator Contact Plate
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Description Type
Style Block 60 mm
XB4 Die Cast Round
Chrome XB4BT42 ZBY9320
1 N.C.
XB4 Die Cast
Chrome XB4BS8445 ZBY9320
INTERFACE

1 N.O. / 1 N.C.
XB5 Double XB5AT42 ZBY9320
Insulated
1 N.C.
XB5 Double
XB5AS8445 ZBY9320
Insulated
1 N.O./ 1 N.C.

When ordering, please specify:

Quantity
Type or Catalog Number

19-8
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type K, SK Common Operators, Complete 22 and 30 mm Most Common Complete
with Contact Blocks Operators
www.se.com/us Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103

Type K and SK Common Operators

Table 19.9: BLACK—Start Push Buttons Table 19.10: RED—Stop Push Buttons
Operator Legend Plate Operator Contact Legend
Description Contact Block Type [1] Description Type [1]
Style [1] Style Block Plate [1]

30 mm 30 mm
Industrial KR1BH13 KN201 Industrial KR1RH13 KN202
(Metal) (Metal)

30 mm 30 mm
Corrosion Corrosion
Resistant SKR1BH13 KN101SP Resistant SKR1RH13 KN102RP
(Non-Metallic) (Non-
Metallic)

Table 19.11: BLACK—Off-On Selector Switch Table 19.12: BLACK—Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch
Contact Contact
Operator Sequence Legend Sequence
Description Type [1] Operator Legend
Style (Contact Block Plate [1] Description (Contact Type [1]
Style Block Plate [1]
Included)
Included)

30 mm
Industrial KS11BH13 KN244 30 mm
(Metal) Industrial KS43BH13 KN260
(Metal)
1 0
0 1 1 0 0
30 mm 30 mm 0 0 1
Corrosion Corrosion
Resistant SKS11BH13 KN144SP
Resistant SKS43BH13 KN160SP
(Non-Metallic) (Non-
Metallic)

Table 19.13: RED—120 Vac—On Pilot Light Table 19.14: GREEN—120 Vac—Off Pilot Light
Operator Legend Plate Operator Legend Plate
Description Type [1] Style Description Type [1] [1]
Style [1]

30 mm 30 mm
Industrial KP1R31 KN203 Industrial KP1G31 KN204
(Metal) (Metal)

30 mm
30 mm Corrosion
Corrosion Resistant
Resistant SKP1R31 KN103SP SKP1G31 KN104SP
(Non-
(Non-Metallic) Metallic)

Table 19.15: RED—120 Vac—On Push-To-Test Pilot Light Table 19.16: GREEN—120 Vac—Off Push-To-Test Pilot Light

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Operator Legend Plate Operator Legend Plate
Description Type [1] Style Description Type [1] [1]
Style [1]

30 mm 30 mm
Industrial KT1R31 KN203 Industrial KT1G31 KN204

INTERFACE
(Metal) (Metal)

30 mm
30 mm Corrosion
Corrosion Resistant
Resistant SKT1R31 KN103SP SKT1G31 KN104RP
(Non-
(Non-Metallic) Metallic)

When ordering, please specify:

Quantity
Class Number (if appropriate)
Type or Catalog Number

19

[1] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

19-9
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Complete Devices
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Complete Devices—Non-Illuminated

Table 19.17: Non-Illuminated Push Buttons, Momentary
(screw clamp terminal connections)
Type of
Shape of Type of Contact Marking Cap Catalog Components
Head Push Color Number
N.O. N.C.
Black XB4BA21 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BA2)
Green XB4BA31 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BA3)
1 — —
Yellow XB4BA51 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BA5)
XB4BA31 XB4BA4322
Blue XB4BA61 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BA6)
— 1 — Red XB4BA42 (ZB4BZ102 + ZB4BA4)
Flush
Black XB4BA25 (ZB4BZ105 + ZB4BA2)
Green XB4BA35 (ZB4BZ105 + ZB4BA3)
1 1 — Red XB4BA45 (ZB4BZ105 + ZB4BA4)
Yellow XB4BA55 (ZB4BZ105 + ZB4BA5)
Blue XB4BA65 (ZB4BZ105 + ZB4BA6)
XB4BP51 XB4BL42 “I”
Flush 1 — Green XB4BA3311 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BA331)
(white)

“O”
Flush — 1 (white) Red XB4BA4322 (ZB4BZ102 + ZB4BA432)

Flush with Black XB4BP21 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BP2)

clear silicone Green XB4BP31 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BP3)
boot 1 — —
Yellow XB4BP51 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BP5)
(color of
XB4BC21 pusher Blue XB4BP61 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BP6)
unobscured) — 1 — Red XB4BP42 (ZB4BZ102 + ZB4BP4)
— 1 — Red XB4BL42 (ZB4BZ102 + ZB4BL4)
Extended
1 1 — Red XB4BL45 (ZB4BZ105 + ZB4BL4)

Mushroom
head 1 — — Black XB4BC21 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BC2)
Ø 40 mm

Table 19.18: Two Button Push Buttons, Momentary

(screw clamp terminal connections)
Shape of Type of Type of Contact Degree of Catalog
Marking Components
Head Push N.O. N.C. Protection Number
One flush *“I”
green push* (white) (ZB4BZ105 +
IP66
19

One 1 1 **“O” XB4BL73415 ZB4BL7341)

extended IP69K
(white)
red push**

XB4BL73415 Table 19.19: Two Button Push Buttons, Momentary + one white central pilot light
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

(screw clamp terminal connections)

Shape of Type of Type of Contact Degree of Pilot Light
Marking Catalog Number
Head Push N.O. N.C. Protection Voltage

One flush
INTERFACE

green push*
One *“I”
extended (white) 24 XB4BW73731B5
IP66 120 XB4BW73731G5
red push** 1 1 **“O” IP69K
One white (white) 240 XB4BW73731M5
central pilot
XB4BL73731●5 light block

Table 19.20: Three Button Push Buttons, Momentary

(screw clamp terminal connections)
Shape of Type of Type of Contact Degree of Catalog
Protec- Marking and Cap Color
Head Push N.O. N.C. Number
tion
White “I” on green background
Two flush White “II” on green background XB4BA731327
pushes *White “Stop” on red background
+ one central IP66
2 1 IP69K
projecting Black “ ” on white background
red push* White “ ” on black background XB4BA711237
*White “Stop” on red background
XB4BA731327
For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .
For Caps, refer to XB4 Accessories, page .

19-10
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB4 Complete Devices 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.21: Non-Illuminated Trigger Action Emergency Stop Push Buttons, Ø 40

mm, Red (screw clamp terminal connections)
Shape Type of Contact Catalog
of Type of Push Components
N.O. N.C. Number
Head
XB4BS9445 Trigger action (ZB4BZ105 +
XB4BT845 push-pull [1] 1 1 XB4BT845 ZB4BT84)
(ZB4BZ105 +
1 1 XB4BS8445 ZB4BS844)
Trigger action
turn-to-release[1] (ZB4BZ141 +
1 2 XB4BS84441 ZB4BS844)
Trigger action
(ZB4BZ105 +
Key release [1] 1 1 XB4BS9445 ZB4BS944)
(No. 455)
Trigger action (ZB4BZ102 +
Push-pull[1] — 1 XB4BT842 ZB4BT84)

XB4BS542 Trigger action (ZB4BZ102 +

Turn-to-release[1] — 1 XB4BS8442 ZB4BS844)
Trigger action (ZB4BZ102 +
Key release [1] — 1 XB4BS9442
(No. 455) ZB4BS944)

Table 19.22: Non-Illuminated Selector Switches and Key Switches (screw clamp
terminal connections) [2]
Shape Type of Contact Number and Type of Catalog
of Type of Operator Components
N.O. N.C. Positions Number
Head
1 — 2-maintained XB4BD21 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BD2)

1 1 2-maintained XB4BD25 (ZB4BZ105 + ZB4BD2)

Standard lever,
XB4BG33 XB4BD33 black 3-maintained XB4BD33 (ZB4BZ103 + ZB4BD3)
2 —
3-momentary (ZB4BZ103 + ZB4BD5)
XB4BD53
to center
1 — 2-maintained XB4BJ21 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BJ2)
Extended lever, 3-maintained XB4BJ33 (ZB4BZ103 + ZB4BJ3)
black
2 —
3-momentary XB4BJ53 (ZB4BZ103 + ZB4BJ5)
to center
XB4BG21 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BG2)
XB4BJ33 2-maintained
1 — XB4BG41 (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BG4)
2-momentary (ZB4BZ101 + ZB4BG6)
Key (No. 455) XB4BG61
to left
XB4BG03 (ZB4BZ103 + ZB4BG0)
2 — 3-maintained

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

XB4BG33 (ZB4BZ103 + ZB4BG3)

NOTE: The symbol indicates key withdrawal position(s).

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .

19 INTERFACE

[1] Trigger action mushroom heads are tamper proof in that a change of contact state is not possible by teasing or floating the operator. For emergency stop applications, always use a trigger
action push button (per EN/IEC 13850).
[2] For contact configurations, see Sequence of Contacts on Selector Switch Bodies, page 19-16.
19-11
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Complete Devices
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Complete Devices—Illuminated

Table 19.23: Pilot Lights with Protected LED™
(screw clamp terminal connections) [3]
Shape of Head Supply Voltage Color Catalog Components
Number
White XB4BVB1 (ZB4BVB1 + ZB4BV013)
Green XB4BVB3 (ZB4BVB3 + ZB4BV033)
24 Vac/Vdc Red XB4BVB4 (ZB4BVB4 + ZB4BV043)
Yellow XB4BVB5 (ZB4BVB5 + ZB4BV053)
XB4BVB5 Blue XB4BVB6 (ZB4BVB6 + ZB4BV063)
White XB4BVG1 (ZB4BVG1 + ZB4BV013)
Green XB4BVG3 (ZB4BVG3 + ZB4BV033)
110–120 Vac Red XB4BVG4 (ZB4BVG4 + ZB4BV043)
Yellow XB4BVG5 (ZB4BVG5 + ZB4BV053)
Blue XB4BVG6 (ZB4BVG6 + ZB4BV063)

Table 19.24: Pilot Lights for BA9s Bulb (screw clamp terminal connections)
Shape of Head Supply Voltage Catalog Components
Color Number
Direct supply, for BA9s (incandescent, LED, neon) V < 250 V, 2.4 W bulb (bulb not included)
White XB4BV61 (ZB4BV6 + ZB4BV01)
Green XB4BV63 (ZB4BV6 + ZB4BV03)
< 250 Vac/Vdc
Red XB4BV64 (ZB4BV6 + ZB4BV04)
Yellow XB4BV65 (ZB4BV6 + ZB4BV05)
XB4BV64 XB4BV33
Transformer type with 1.2 VA, 6 V secondary. BA9s incandescent bulb included
White XB4BV31 (ZB4BV3 + ZB4BV01)
110–120 Vac Green XB4BV33 (ZB4BV3 + ZB4BV03)
50/60 Hz Red XB4BV34 (ZB4BV3 + ZB4BV04)
Yellow XB4BV35 (ZB4BV3 + ZB4BV05)

Table 19.25: Illuminated Push Buttons, Momentary (screw clamp terminal

connections) [3]
Type of
Shape Contact Supply Color Catalog
Description Voltage Components
of Head of Push Number
N.O. N.C.
Flush
White XB4BW31B5 (ZB4BW0B15 + ZB4BW313)
Green XB4BW33B5 (ZB4BW0B35 + ZB4BW333)
XB4BW33B5
XB4BW3465 24 Vac/Vdc Red XB4BW34B5 (ZB4BW0B45 + ZB4BW343)
Yellow XB4BW35B5 (ZB4BW0B55 + ZB4BW353)
Blue XB4BW36B5 (ZB4BW0B65 + ZB4BW363)
1 1
19

White XB4BW31G5 (ZB4BW0G15 + ZB4BW313)

Green XB4BW33G5 (ZB4BW0G35 + ZB4BW333)
110–120 Red XB4BW34G5 (ZB4BW0G45 + ZB4BW343)
Vac
Yellow XB4BW35G5 (ZB4BW0G55 + ZB4BW353)
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Blue XB4BW36G5 (ZB4BW0G65 + ZB4BW363)

XB4BW3545 (ZB4BW065 + ZB4BW31)
Direct supply White XB4BW3165
for BA9s Green XB4BW3365 (ZB4BW065 + ZB4BW33)
< 250 Vac/
2.4 W max. 1 1 Vdc
bulb not Red XB4BW3465 (ZB4BW065 + ZB4BW34)
included Yellow XB4BW3565 (ZB4BW065 + ZB4BW35)
INTERFACE

White XB4BW3135 (ZB4BW035 + ZB4BW31)

Transformer 110–120 Green XB4BW3335 (ZB4BW035 + ZB4BW33)
type Vac
50/60 Hz Red XB4BW3435 (ZB4BW035 + ZB4BW34)
1.2 VA, 6 V
secondary. Yellow XB4BW3535 (ZB4BW035 + ZB4BW35)
1 1
BA9s White XB4BW3145 (ZB4BW045 + ZB4BW31)
incandescent 230–240
bulb Green XB4BW3345 (ZB4BW045 + ZB4BW33)
Vac
included 50/60 Hz Red XB4BW3445 (ZB4BW045 + ZB4BW34)
Yellow XB4BW3545 (ZB4BW045 + ZB4BW35)
Extended
White XB4BW11B5 (ZB4BW0B15 + ZB4BW113)
Green XB4BW13B5 (ZB4BW0B35 + ZB4BW133)
24 Vac/Vdc Red XB4BW14B5 (ZB4BW0B45 + ZB4BW143)
Yellow XB4BW15B5 (ZB4BW0B55 + ZB4BW153)
Blue XB4BW16B5 (ZB4BW0B65 + ZB4BW163)
1 1
White XB4BW11G5 (ZB4BW0G15 + ZB4BW113)
Green XB4BW13G5 (ZB4BW0G35 + ZB4BW133)
110–120 (ZB4BW0G45 + ZB4BW143)
Red XB4BW14G5
Vac
Yellow XB4BW15G5 (ZB4BW0G55 + ZB4BW153)
Blue XB4BW16G5 (ZB4BW0G65 + ZB4BW163)

For legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page , and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .

[3] For 240 V LED, replace the last “B” or “G” in the catalog number with an “M”. For example, XB4BVB1 (24 V) becomes XB4BVM1 (240 V—AC only).
19-12
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB4 Operators 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Operators
Table 19.26: Non-Illuminated Operators, Momentary—Unmarked
Shape of Head Type of Push Cap Color Catalog Number

Flush, without color cap [4] — ZB4BA0

White
ZB4BA0 ZB4BA4 Black
Flush, with set of 6 color Green
caps ZB4BA9
Red
Yellow
Blue
White ZB4BA1
Black ZB4BA2
Green ZB4BA3
ZB4BA38 ZB4BP18 Flush Red ZB4BA4
Yellow ZB4BA5
Blue ZB4BA6
Gray ZB4BA8
White ZB4BA18
Flush with transparent cap, Green ZB4BA38
for insertion of legend [5] Red ZB4BA48
Yellow ZB4BA58
ZB4BL1 ZB4BA36 Blue ZB4BA68
White ZB4BPA1
Booted Flush (clear Black ZB4BPA2
Green ZB4BPA3
silicone) Cap color
unobscured Red ZB4BPA4
Yellow ZB4BPA5
Blue ZB4BPA6
White ZB4BP1
Booted Extended (clear Black ZB4BP2
Green ZB4BP3
silicone) Cap color
unobscured Red ZB4BP4
Yellow ZB4BP5
Blue ZB4BP6
White ZB4BP1S
Black ZB4BP2S
Booted (colored silicone) Green ZB4BP3S
Cap color unobscured Red ZB4BP4S
Yellow ZB4BP5S
Blue ZB4BP6S
White ZB4BP18
Booted (clear silicone) for Green ZB4BP38
insertion of legend [5] Cap Red ZB4BP48
color unobscured Yellow ZB4BP58
Blue ZB4BP68
White ZB4BL1
Black ZB4BL2
Extended Green ZB4BL3
Red ZB4BL4
Yellow ZB4BL5
Blue ZB4BL6

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

White ZB4BA16
Black ZB4BA26
Guarded Head Green ZB4BA36
Red ZB4BA46
Yellow ZB4BA56
Blue ZB4BA66

INTERFACE
Table 19.27: Non-Illuminated Operators, Momentary—Premarked
Shape of Head Type of Push Marking Text Marking Color Cap Color Catalog Number
White Green ZB4BA331
I
Black White ZB4BA131
White Green ZB4BA333
START
Black White ZB4BA133
ZB4BA331 ZB4BA334 White Green ZB4BA341
ON
Black White ZB4BA141
RESET White Black ZB4BA222
JOG White Black ZB4BA245
Flush
Red ZB4BA432
O White
Black ZB4BA232
ZB4BL432 Red ZB4BA434
STOP White

19
Black ZB4BA234
Red ZB4BA435
OFF White
Black ZB4BA235
[6] Black White ZB4BA334
White Black ZB4BA335
Red ZB4BL432
O White
Black ZB4BL232
Red ZB4BL434
Extended STOP White
Black ZB4BL234
Red ZB4BL435
OFF White
Black ZB4BL235

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page , and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .

[4] Color cap to be ordered separately, see XB4 Accessories, page .

[5] For legend ordering information, see XB4 Legend Sheets, page .
[6] Cap supplied not clipped-in, allowing orientation of arrow in any one of 4 directions:

19-13
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Operators
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.28: Non-Illuminated Push-on/Push-off Operators

Shape of Head Type of Push Color of Push Catalog Number
White ZB4BH01
Black ZB4BH02
Green ZB4BH03
ZB4BH02 Flush
Red ZB4BH04
Yellow ZB4BH05
Blue ZB4BH06
White ZB4BH1
Black ZB4BH2
Green ZB4BH3
Extended
Red ZB4BH4
Yellow ZB4BH5
Blue ZB4BH6

Table 19.29: Three Head Operators, Momentary

Shape of Head Description Marking Cap Color Degree of Catalog Number
Protection
Premarked
“I” (white) Green
“II” (white) Green ZB4BA73132
“ ” (white) Green
“ ” (white) Green ZB4BA73133
“ ” (white) Green
“ ” (white) ZB4BA73134
Green
“+” (white) Green
“-” (white) ZB4BA73135
ZB4BA73133 ZB4BA71124 Green IP66
Two flush
“+” (black) White IP69K
Two flush “-” (black) ZB4BA71115
White
+ one central
projecting red push “ ” (black) White
“ ” (white) ZB4BA71123
marked “Stop” Black
“ ” (black) White
“ ” (white) Black ZB4BA71124
“ ” (white) Black
“ ” (white) Black ZB4BA72124
Without caps
Two flush IP66
without caps — — IP69K ZB4BA791

Table 19.30: Two Head Operators, Momentary

Shape of Head Description Marking Cap Color Degree of Catalog
Protection Number
No Marking
Green ZB4BA7340
— Red
Two flush
White
19

— ZB4BA7120
Black
IP66
IP69K

ZB4BA7121 ZB4BL7341 One flush Green

— ZB4BL7340
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

One extended Red

Premarked
“I” (white) Green
“O” (white) ZB4BA7341
Red
INTERFACE

Two flush
“I” (black) White
“O” (white) Black ZB4BA7121
IP66
IP69K

One flush “I” (white) Green

“O” (white) ZB4BL7341
One extended Red

Without caps

Two flush IP66

without caps — — ZB4BA79
IP69K

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page , and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .

19-14
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB4 Operators and Emergency Stop 22 mm Push Buttons
Operators
www.se.com/us Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN

XB4 Operators and Emergency Stop Operators

Table 19.31: Mushroom Heads, Momentary
Shape of Head Diameter of Head Color of Head Catalog Number
Black ZB4BC24
Green ZB4BC34
30 mm Red ZB4BC44
Yellow ZB4BC54
Blue ZB4BC64
Black ZB4BC2
ZB4BC24 ZB4BC2 Green ZB4BC3
40 mm Red ZB4BC4
Yellow ZB4BC5
Blue ZB4BC6
Black ZB4BR2
Green ZB4BR3
60 mm Red ZB4BR4
Yellow ZB4BR5
Blue ZB4BR6

Table 19.32: Mushroom Heads for Maintained Push Buttons

ZB4BR2
Shape of Head Type of Push Diameter of Head Color Catalog Number
For use in Emergency Stop applications
40 mm Red ZB4BT84
Trigger action
Push-pull [7] 60 mm Red ZB4BX84

30 mm Red ZB4BS834
ZB4BS834 ZB4BT4 Trigger action Red ZB4BS844
Turn-to-release [7] 40 mm
Red marked “EMO” ZB4BS84430
60 mm Red ZB4BS864
30 mm Red ZB4BS934
Trigger action 40 mm Red ZB4BS944 [8]
Key release
(No. 455) [7] 60 mm Red ZB4BS964
For use in non-Emergency Stop applications
40 mm Black ZB4BT2
Push-pull
60 mm Black ZB4BX2

ZB4BS64 ZB4BS74 30 mm Black ZB4BS42

Black ZB4BS52
Yellow ZB4BS55
Turn-to-release 40 mm
Yellow marked
“Robot Stop” ZB4BS5550
60 mm Black ZB4BS62

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

30 mm Black ZB4BS72
Key release 40 mm Black ZB4BS12
(No. 455)
60 mm Black ZB4BS22

Table 19.33: Circular Legends for Emergency Stop Mushroom Heads

INTERFACE
ZBY9320 (yellow background)
Diameter Text Catalog Number
Blank ZBY8101
90 mm
EMERGENCY STOP ZBY8330
Blank ZBY9121
Emergency Stop ZBY9320
60 mm Bezeled
Prada de Emergencia ZBY9420
Not Halt ZBY9220

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24,XB4 Legend Inserts, page , andXB4 Legend Sheets,
page .

19

[7] Trigger action mushroom heads are tamper proof in that a change of contact state is not possible by teasing or floating the operator. For emergency stop applications, always use a trigger
action push button (per EN/IEC 13850).
[8] Other key numbers:
—key no. 421E: add the suffix 12 to the catalog number.
—key no. 458A: add the suffix 10 to the catalog number.
—key no. 520E: add the suffix 14 to the catalog number.
—key no. 3131A: add the suffix 20 to the catalog number.
Example: The catalog number for a Ø 40 mm red mushroom head for a trigger action, maintained push button, with release by
key no. 421E becomes: ZB5AS94412.
19-15
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Selector Switches
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Selector Switches

Table 19.34: Non-Illuminated Selector Switches [9]

Color Number and Type of Positions

Standard Lever [10]
Extended Lever
Catalog Number
Black 2-maintained ZB4BD2 ZB4BJ2
ZB4BD4 ZB4BJ3
Standard Lever Extended Lever 2-momentary from
Black right to left ZB4BD4 ZB4BJ4

Black 3-maintained ZB4BD3 ZB4BJ3

Black 3-momentary to center ZB4BD5 ZB4BJ5

Black 3-momentary from

left to center ZB4BD7 ZB4BJ7

3-momentary from
Black right to center ZB4BD8 ZB4BJ8

Table 19.35: Non-Illuminated Key Switches [9]

Type of Operator Number and Type of Positions Catalog
Number
ZB4BG2

2-maintained ZB4BG02

ZB4BG4
ZB4BG8 2-momentary from
right to left ZB4BG6

ZB4BG0

Key (No. 455)

ZB4BG3
NOTE: The symbol indicates key
withdrawal position(s).
Other key numbers: ZB4BG03
—key no. 421E: add the suffix 12 to the
catalog number.
—key no. 458A: add the suffix 10 to the 3-maintained ZB4BG04
catalog number.
—key no. 520E: add the suffix 14 to the
catalog number. ZB4BG5
—key no. 3131A: add the suffix 20 to the
19

catalog number.
—key no. 8D1: add the suffix D to the catalog ZB4BG9
number.
ZB4BG09
Example: The catalog number for a head
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

with key no. 421E for a 2 position

maintained, lockable selector switch, with ZB4BG1
key withdrawal from the left-hand position, 3-momentary from
becomes: ZB5AG212 left to center
ZB4BG01

3-momentary to center
INTERFACE

ZB4BG7

ZB4BG8

3-momentary from right

to center ZB4BG05

ZB4BG08

Table 19.36: Sequence of Contacts on Selector Switch Bodies

Selector Switches
Unit Type
2-position 3-position
315° 45° 315° 0° 45°
Note:
L=Left, C=Center, R=Right,
O=Open, X=Closed

Up
Operator Plunger
Position Down
Contact Block Location L C R L C R L C R L C R L C R
N.O. O O O X X X X X O O O O O X X
Contacts
N.C. X X X O O O O O X X X X X O O

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page , and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .
For Selector Switch Sequence, refer to Sequence of Contacts on Illuminated Selector Switch Bodies, page 19-19.

[9] For contact configurations, see Sequence of Contacts on Selector Switch Bodies, page 19-16.
[10] For colored lever, add the following code to the end of part number: 01–white, 03–green, 04–red, 05–yellow, 06–blue (Example: ZB4BD204).
19-16
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB4 Specialty Operators 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Specialty Operators

Table 19.37: Potentiometer Operator (with Mounting Collar)
Shape of Head Description Application Catalog Number
For potentiometer with For shaft Ø 1/4 in. (6.35 mm) ZB4BD922
shaft length 1.73 to 1.97 in.
(45 to 50 mm) For shaft Ø 0.24 in. (6 mm) ZB4BD912
(potentiometer not included)

Table 19.38: Complete Potentiometers

Description Resistance (k Ω) Weight (kg/lb) Catalog Number
+/- 10% linear mode precision 1 0.095/0.209 XB4BD912R1K
complete potentiometer with 4.7 0.095/0.209 XB4BD912R4K7
ZB4BD922 screw terminals 10 0.095/0.209 XB4BD912R10K
47 0.095/0.209 XB4BD912R47K
100 0.095/0.209 XB4BD912R100K
470 0.095/0.209 XB4BD912R470K

Table 19.39: Two Position Toggle Switch

Shape of Head Color Type of Positions Catalog Number
Black Maintained ZB4BD28
Black Momentary ZB4BD48

Table 19.40: Reset Operators, Flush, Adjustable Shaft

XB4BD912R1K Travel Actuation Distance
Shape of Head Color Catalog Number
in. mm in. mm
Black XB4BA821
0.24–
6–16 Red XB4BA841
0.63
Blue XB4BA861
0.39 10
Black XB4BA822
0.63– 16–26 Red XB4BA842
1.02
Blue XB4BA862
ZB4BD28 Black XB4BA921
1.18–
30–130 Red XB4BA941
5.12
Blue XB4BA961
0.55 14
Black XB4BA922
5.12– 130–257 Red XB4BA942
10.12
Blue XB4BA962

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page , and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .
XB4BA8●1

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

19-17
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Pilot Lights
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Pilot Lights

Table 19.41: Pilot Light Heads
For Use with Body
Shape of Head Comprising Light Color of Lens Catalog Number
Module Type
White ZB4BV013
Green ZB4BV033
Protected LED™ only Red ZB4BV043
ZB4BV063 ZB4BV04 Yellow ZB4BV053
Blue ZB4BV063
White ZB4BV013S
Protected LED only Green ZB4BV033S
Fresnel (jeweled) lens [11] Red ZB4BV043S
Amber ZB4BV053S
Blue ZB4BV063S
White ZB4BV01
ZB4BV043S Green ZB4BV03
For BA9s incandescent Red ZB4BV04
bulb, neon or LED only [12] Yellow ZB4BV05
Blue ZB4BV06
Clear ZB4BV07
White ZB4BV01S
For BA9s incandescent Green ZB4BV03S
bulb, neon or LED Red ZB4BV04S
Fresnel (jeweled) lens [12] Amber ZB4BV05S
Blue ZB4BV06S
Clear ZB4BV07S

Table 19.42: Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Light Module for BA9s
Incandescent Bulb, Neon or LED)
Description Light Source Supply Voltage (V) Catalog Number
Screw clamp terminal connections
Direct supply BA9s bulb 2.4 W max.
Not included [12] <250 ZB4BV6

Direct supply BA9s incandescent 24 v 2 Watt ZB4BV624

bulb included
Direct supply BA9s incandescent
ZB4BV6 bulb included 120 v 2.4 Watt ZB4BV6120
110–120 Vac
ZB4BV3
50/60 Hz
230–240 Vac
50/60 Hz ZB4BV4
Transformer type BA9s incandescent
1.2 VA, 6 V secondary bulb included 400–50 Hz ZB4BV5
440–480 Vac
ZB4BV8
60 Hz
550–600 Vac ZB4BV9
60 Hz
19

Table 19.43: Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Light Module with Protected
LED™) [13]
Light Source Supply Voltage Color of Light Source Catalog Number
Screw clamp terminal connections [14]
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

White ZB4BVJ1
Green ZB4BVJ3
12 Vac/Vdc Red ZB4BVJ4
Yellow ZB4BVJ5
Blue ZB4BVJ6
White ZB4BVB1
INTERFACE

ZB4BV• ZB4BV••
Green ZB4BVB3
24 Vac/Vdc Red ZB4BVB4
Yellow ZB4BVB5
Blue ZB4BVB6
White ZB4BVBG1
Green ZB4BVBG3
24–120 Vac/Vdc Red ZB4BVBG4
Yellow ZB4BVBG5
Blue ZB4BVBG6
White ZB4BVG1
Green ZB4BVG3
110–120 Vac Red ZB4BVG4
Yellow ZB4BVG5
Blue ZB4BVG6
White ZB4BV18B1
Flashing Green ZB4BV18B3
24 Vac/Vdc Red ZB4BV18B4
Yellow ZB4BV18B5
Blue ZB4BV18B6
White ZB4BV18G1
Green ZB4BV18G3
110–120 Vac Red ZB4BV18G4
Yellow ZB4BV18G5
Blue ZB4BV18G6

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .

[11] For use in bright ambient conditions, for example, in sunlight.

[12] Order bulb separately; see BA9s Bulbs and Associated Accessories, page . For BA9 LED, see LED, BA9s Base, page .
[13] For 240 V LED, replace the last “B” or “G” in the catalog number with an “M”. For example, ZB4BVB1 (24 V) becomes ZB4BVM1 (240 V).
[14] For Quick-Connect version, add “3” to the end of the catalog number Example: ZB4BVJ13 (Quick-Connect size 1 x 1/40" or 2 x 0.110").
19-18
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB4 Illuminated Operators 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Illuminated Operators

Table 19.44: Heads for Momentary Illuminated Push Buttons
Shape of Head Type of Push Color Catalog Number
Only use with Protected LED™ light modules
White ZB4BW313
Green ZB4BW333
Flush Red ZB4BW343
ZB4BW333 ZB4BW563 Yellow ZB4BW353
Blue ZB4BW363
White ZB4BW513
Green ZB4BW533
Flush with clear silicone boot Red ZB4BW543
Yellow ZB4BW553
Blue ZB4BW563
ZB4BW113 ZB4BW33 White ZB4BA18
Green ZB4BA38
Flush for insertion of legend Red ZB4BA48
Yellow ZB4BA58
Blue ZB4BA68
White ZB4BW113
Green ZB4BW133
ZB4BW14 Extended Red ZB4BW143
Yellow ZB4BW153
Blue ZB4BW163
Clear ZB4BW413
Green ZB4BW433
Mushroom (40 mm) Red ZB4BW443
Yellow ZB4BW453
Blue ZB4BW463
Only use with light modules for a BA9s incandescent bulb, neon or LED
White ZB4BW31
Green ZB4BW33
Red ZB4BW34
Flush
Yellow ZB4BW35
Blue ZB4BW36
Clear ZB4BW37
White ZB4BW11
Green ZB4BW13
Red ZB4BW14
Extended
Yellow ZB4BW15
Blue ZB4BW16
Clear ZB4BW17

Table 19.45: Heads for Maintained Illuminated Push Buttons

Shape of Head Type of Push Color of Lens Catalog Number
Only use with Protected LED light modules

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Clear ZB4BW613
Green ZB4BW633
Push/Pull Mushroom (40 mm) Red ZB4BW643
ZB4BW643 Yellow ZB4BW653
Blue ZB4BW663

INTERFACE
Table 19.46: Illuminated Push-On/Push-Off Operators
Shape of Head Type of Push Color of Lens Catalog Number
Only use with Protected LED light modules
White ZB4BH013
Green ZB4BH033
Flush Red ZB4BH043
ZB4BH033 ZB4BH63 Yellow ZB4BH053
Blue ZB4BH063
White ZB4BH13
Green ZB4BH33
Extended Red ZB4BH43
Yellow ZB4BH53

19
Blue ZB4BH63

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .

19-19
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Illuminated Operators
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.47: Two Button with Clear Pilot Light, Momentary

Shape of Head Description Marking Cap Color Degree of Catalog
Protection Number
No Marking
Green
— Red ZB4BW7A3740
Two flush
White
— ZB4BW7A1720
Black
IP66
ZB4BW7A3741 ZB4BW7A1721 IP69K

One flush Green

— ZB4BW7L3740
One extended Red

Premarked
“I” (white) Green
“O” (white) ZB4BW7A3741
Red
Two flush
“I” (black) White
“O” (white) Black ZB4BW7A1721

One flush “I” (white) Green

One extended “O” (white) ZB4BW7L3741
Red

IP66
IP69K
“ ” (black) White
Two flush “ ” (white) ZB4BW7A1724
Black

“+” (black) White

Two flush “-” (white) ZB4BW7A1715
Black

Without caps
Two flush IP66
without caps — — IP69K ZB4BW7A9

Table 19.48: Illuminated Selector Switches, Standard Lever

Shape of Head Number and Type of Positions Catalog Number
[15]
Only use with Protected LED light modules
2-maintained ZB4BK12●3
ZB4BK1343 2-momentary from right to left ZB4BK14●3
19

3-maintained ZB4BK13●3

3-momentary to center ZB4BK15●3

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

3-momentary from right to center ZB4BK18●3

3-momentary from left to center ZB4BK17●3

INTERFACE

Table 19.49: Sequence of Contacts on Illuminated Selector Switch Bodies

Selector Switches
Unit Type
2-position 3-position
315° 45° 315° 0° 45°

Up
Operator Plunger
Position Down
Contact Block Location L R L R L R L R L R
N.O. O O X X X O O O O X
Contacts
N.C. X X O O O X X X X O
Note: L=Left, R=Right, O=Open, X=Closed

2 Position Selector Switch 3 Position Selector Switch

Contact block guide Contact block guide

O X 1 N.O. (left or right) O O X 1 N.O. (left)

X O 1 N.C. (left or right) X O X 2 N.O. wired in parallel (side by side)
O X 1 N.O. X O O 1 N.O. (right)
and O X X 1 N.C. (right)
X O 1 N.C. X X O 1 N.C. (left)
O X O 2 N.C. wired in series (side by side)

For Legends, refer to XB4 Legend Holders, page 19-24, XB4 Legend Inserts, page , and XB4 Legend Sheets,
page .
For Caps, refer to XB4 Accessories, page .

[15] ● Designate color as follows: 1—white, 3—green, 4—red, 5—yellow, 6—blue.

19-20
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB4 Electrical Components 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Electrical Components

Table 19.50: Contact Blocks (Mounting Collar with Contact Blocks)
Type of Contact
Description Catalog Number
N.O. N.C.
1 — ZB4BZ101
— 1 ZB4BZ102
Screw clamp terminal 2 — ZB4BZ103
connections — 2 ZB4BZ104
1 1 ZB4BZ105
ZB4BZ101 1 2 ZB4BZ141
For Quick-Connect version add “3” to the end of the catalog number Example: ZB4BZ1013 (Quick-Connect size 1 x
0.250" or 2 x 0.110").
For Ring Tongue compatible blocks add “9” to the end of the catalog number (Example: ZB4BZ1029).
Electrical components with connection by printed circuit board pins are available. Refer to Catalog 9001CT0001.
Electrical components with connection by plug-in connector are available. Refer to Catalog 9001CT0001.

Table 19.51: Complete Bodies

(Mounting Collar + Single Contact Block + Light Module with Protected LED™)
Type of Contact Supply Voltage [17]
[16]
Light Source Color 24 Vac/Vdc 110–120 Vac
N.O. N.C.
Catalog Number
Screw clamp terminal connections
White ZB4BW0B11 ZB4BW0G11
ZB4BW0••3 ZB4BW06• Green ZB4BW0B31 ZB4BW0G31
1 — Red ZB4BW0B41 ZB4BW0G41
Yellow ZB4BW0B51 ZB4BW0G51
Blue ZB4BW0B61 ZB4BW0G61
White ZB4BW0B12 ZB4BW0G12
Green ZB4BW0B32 ZB4BW0G32
— 1 Red ZB4BW0B42 ZB4BW0G42
Yellow ZB4BW0B52 ZB4BW0G52
Blue ZB4BW0B62 ZB4BW0G62
White ZB4BW0B13 ZB4BW0G13
Green ZB4BW0B33 ZB4BW0G33
2 — Red ZB4BW0B43 ZB4BW0G43
Yellow ZB4BW0B53 ZB4BW0G53
Blue ZB4BW0B63 ZB4BW0G63
White ZB4BW0B15 ZB4BW0G15
Green ZB4BW0B35 ZB4BW0G35
1 1 Red ZB4BW0B45 ZB4BW0G45
Yellow ZB4BW0B55 ZB4BW0G55
Blue ZB4BW0B65 ZB4BW0G65

Table 19.52: Mounting Collar, Contact Block and Light Module (with screw clamp
terminal connections)

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Type of Contact
Supply [18] Color of Light
Supply Light Source Catalog Number
Voltage Source
N.O. N.C.
Screw clamp terminal connections

INTERFACE
1 — — ZB4BW061
BA9s — 1 — ZB4BW062
ZB4BW0•5 Direct supply 2.4 W max. bulb < 250 Vac/Vdc
Not included [19] 2 — — ZB4BW063
1 1 — ZB4BW065
110–120 Vac 1 — — ZB4BW031
50/60 Hz 1 1 — ZB4BW035
Transformer type BA9s
1.2 VA, 6 V incandescent 230–240 Vac 1 — — ZB4BW041
secondary bulb included 50/60 Hz 1 1 — ZB4BW045
440–480 Vac
60 Hz 1 — — ZB4BW081

19

[16] Can be fitted with additional contact blocks, see Table 19.54 Add-On Contact Block (with screw clamp terminal connections) , page 19-22.
[17] For 240V LED, replace the “B” or “G” with “M”. (Example: change “ZB4BW0B11 (24V) to ZB4BW0M11 (240V))
[18] Can be fitted with additional contact blocks, see Table 19.54 Add-On Contact Block (with screw clamp terminal connections) , page 19-22.
[19] Order bulb separately, see BA9s Bulbs and Associated Accessories.
19-21
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Electrical Components
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.53: Body/Mounting Collar

For use with Catalog Number
Electrical block (contact or light module) ZB4BZ009

Table 19.54: Add-On Contact Block (with screw clamp terminal connections) [20][21]
Type of Contact
Description Catalog Number
N.O. N.C.
ZB4BZ009
1 — ZBE101
Standard single contact blocks [22][23]
— 1 ZBE102
2 — ZBE203
Standard double contact blocks [22][23] — 2 ZBE204
1 1 ZBE205
Special contact blocks for low power switching [24] 1 — ZBE1016
— 1 ZBE1026
Dusty environment [24] 1 — ZBE1016P
Low-power switching
(IP5X, 50 µm dust) — 1 ZBE1026P
ZBE101 ZBE203
Early make
N.O. 1 – ZBE201
Late break
N.C. — 1 ZBE202
Staggered contacts
Overlapping
N.O.+N.C. 1 1 ZB4BZ106
Staggered
N.O.+N.C. — 2 ZB4BZ107

Table 19.55: Light Modules (with screw clamp terminal connections) [20][21]
Description Supply Voltage Color of Light Catalog Number
Source
White ZBVJ1
Green ZBVJ3
12 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVJ4
Yellow ZBVJ5
Blue ZBVJ6
White ZBVB1
ZBVB•
Green ZBVB3
24 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVB4
Yellow ZBVB5
Blue ZBVB6
White ZBVG1
Green ZBVG3
110–120 Vac Red ZBVG4
Yellow ZBVG5
Blue ZBVG6
White ZBVBG1
Green ZBVBG3
24–120 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVBG4
Yellow ZBVBG5
19

Blue ZBVBG6
White ZBVM1
Green ZBVM3
230–240 Vac Red ZBVM4
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Yellow ZBVM5
Blue ZBVM6
Direct supply for BA9s
2.4 W max. bulb not included
See BA9s Bulbs and Associated Accessories , < 250 Vac/Vdc — ZBV6
page
INTERFACE

[20] Electrical components with connection by printed circuit board pins are available. Refer to Catalog 9001CT0001 for more details.
[21] Electrical components with connection by plug-in connector are available. Refer to Catalog9001CT0001for more details.
[22] For Quick-Connect version add “3” to the end of the catalog number Example: ZBE1013 (Quick-Connect size 1 x 0.250 in. or 2 x 0.110 in.).
[23] For Ring Tongue compatible blocks add “9” to the end of the catalog number (Example: ZBE1029).
[24] Cannot stack additional contact blocks onto these blocks.
19-22
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB4 Electrical Components 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.56: Body/Mounting Collar

For use with Catalog Number
Contact block or light module ZB4BZ009

Table 19.57: Light Modules [25]

Spring Terminal Connections
Description Supply voltage Color of light source Catalog Number
ZB4BZ009
White ZBVJ15
Green ZBVJ35
12 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVJ45
Orange ZBVJ55
Blue ZBVJ65
White ZBVB15
Green ZBVB35
Integral LED (to combine with 24 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVB45
heads for integral LED)
Orange ZBVB55
Blue ZBVB65
White ZBVG15
ZB4BZ1015 Green ZBVG35
110–120 Vac Red ZBVG45
Orange ZBVG55
Blue ZBVG65
White ZBVM15
Green ZBVM35
230–240 Vac Red ZBVM45
Orange ZBVM55
Blue ZBVM65

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

[25] Additional blocks cannot be attached to the back of these contact blocks or light modules. However, spring terminal contact blocks can be mounted behind screw terminal contact blocks.
19-23
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB4 Legend Holders
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121212EN
www.se.com/us

XB4 Legend Holders

Table 19.58: Standard (30 x 40 mm) Legend Holders for 8 x 27 mm Legends
Legend
Description Catalog Number
Color Text
Without legend [26] — — ZBZ32
With blank legend Black or red background — ZBY2101
(for engraving) White or yellow background — ZBY4101
Custom Legend Black background White ZBY2002
(Specify Engraving) Red background White ZBY2004
2 lines of 11 characters
ZBZ32 ZBY•101 (including spaces) White background Black ZBY4001
maximum per line Yellow background Black ZBY4005
O (black background) ZBY2146
O (red background) ZBY2931
With legend marked with I ZBY2147
Black or red background [27] II ZBY2148
international language
O-I ZBY2178
I-II ZBY2179
ZBY2303 I-O-II ZBY2186
AUTO ZBY2115
AUTO-HAND ZBY2364
AUTO-O-HAND ZBY2385
CLOSE ZBY2314
DOWN ZBY2308
EMERGENCY STOP ZBY2330
FAST ZBY2328
FORWARD ZBY2305
FOR-REV ZBY2371
HAND ZBY2316
HAND-OFF-AUTO ZBY2387
INCH ZBY2321
JOG ZBY2382
LEFT ZBY2310
With legend marked with OFF ZBY2312
Black or red background[27]
English language
OFF-ON ZBY2367
ON ZBY2311
OPEN ZBY2313
POWER ON ZBY2326
RESET (red background) ZBY2323
RESET (black background) ZBY2322
REVERSE ZBY2306
RIGHT ZBY2309
RUN ZBY2334
SLOW ZBY2327
19

START ZBY2303
STOP ZBY2304
STOP-START ZBY2366
UP ZBY2307
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

XB5 Complete Devices

Table 19.59: Non-Illuminated Push Buttons, Momentary (screw clamp terminal
connections)
Type of Contact
INTERFACE

Shape of Type of Marking Cap Catalog Number Components

Head Push N.O. N.C. Color
Black XB5AA21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AA2)
Green XB5AA31 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AA3)
1 — —
Yellow XB5AA51 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AA5)
XB5AA31 XB5AA4322 Blue XB5AA61 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AA6)
— 1 — Red XB5AA42 (ZB5AZ102 + ZB5AA4)
Flush
Black XB5AA25 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AA2)
Green XB5AA35 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AA3)
1 1 — Red XB5AA45 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AA4)
Yellow XB5AA55 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AA5)
Blue XB5AA65 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AA6)

XB5AP51 XB5AL42 “I” (ZB5AZ101 +

Flush 1 — (white) Green XB5AA3311 ZB5AA331)

“O” (ZB5AZ102 +
Flush — 1 (white) Red XB5AA4322 ZB5AA432)

Flush with Black XB5AP21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AP2)

clear silicone Green XB5AP31 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AP3)
boot 1 — —
Yellow XB5AP51 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AP5)
(color of
pusher Blue XB5AP61 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AP6)
unobscured) — 1 — Red XB5AP42 (ZB5AZ102 + ZB5AP4)
XB5AC21 — 1 — Red XB5AL42 (ZB5AZ102 + ZB5AL4)
Extended
1 1 — Red XB5AL45 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AL4)

Mushroom
head 1 — — Black XB5AC21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AC2)
Ø 40 mm

[26] For marked legends, see, Marked Legends for 30 x 40 mm legend holders, page .
[27] Start functions: white letters on black background. Stop functions: white letters on red background (unless otherwise specified above).
19-24
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Complete Devices 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.60: Two Button Push Buttons, Momentary (screw clamp terminal
connections)
Shape of Type of Type of Contact Degree of Catalog
Marking Protec- Components
Head Push N.O. N.C. Number
tion
One flush *“I”
green push* (white) (ZB5AZ105 +
One IP66 XB5AL73415
1 1 **“O” IP69K ZB5AL7341)
extended (white)
XB5AL73415 red push**

Table 19.61: Two Button Push Buttons, Momentary + one white central pilot light
(screw clamp terminal connections)
Shape of Type of Type of Contact Degree of Pilot Light
Marking Voltage Catalog Number
Head Push N.O. N.C. Protection
One flush 24 XB5AW73731B5
green push* 120 XB5AW73731G5
One *“I”
extended (white) IP66
red push** 1 1 **“O” IP69K
One white (white) 240 XB5AW73731M5
XB5AW73731●5 central pilot
light block

Table 19.62: Three Button Push Buttons, Momentary (screw clamp terminal
connections)
Type of Contact Degree of
Shape of Type of Protec- Marking and Cap Color Catalog Number
Head Push N.O. N.C. tion
White “I” on green background
Two flush White “II” on green background XB5AA731327
pushes *White “Stop” on red background
+ one central IP66
2 1 IP69K
projecting Black “ ” on white background
red push* White “ ” on black background XB5AA711237
XB5AA731327 *White “Stop” on red background

For Legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40 and XB5 Legend Inserts, page .
Caps, see XB5 Accessories, page .

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

19-25
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Complete Devices
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.63: Non-Illuminated Trigger Action Emergency Stop Push Buttons, Ø 40

mm (Red) (screw clamp terminal connections)
Shape of Type of Contact Catalog
Type of Push Components
Head N.O. N.C. Number

Trigger action (ZB5AZ105 +

push-pull [28] 1 1 XB5AT845 ZB5AT84)

(ZB5AZ105 +
XB5AS 40 mm KR XB5AS 40 mm TR Trigger action 1 1 XB5AS8445 ZB5AS844)
turn-to-release
[28] (ZB5AZ104 +
— 2 XB5AS8444 ZB5AS844)

Trigger action
(ZB5AZ105+
Key release 1 1 XB5AS9445
(No. 455) [28] ZB5AS944)

Trigger action (ZB5AZ102 +

Push-pull [28] — 1 XB5AT842 ZB5AT84)

XB5AT 40 mm PP
Trigger action (ZB5AZ102 +
Turn-to-release — 1 XB5AS8442 ZB5AS844)
[28]

Trigger action
(ZB5AZ102 +
Key release — 1 XB5AS9442 ZB5AS944)
(No. 455) [28]

Table 19.64: Non-Illuminated Selector Switches and Key Switches (screw clamp
terminal connections) [29]
Type of
Shape of Type of Contact Number and Type of Catalog Components
Head Operator Positions Number
N.O. N.C.
1 — 2-maintained XB5AD21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AD2)

XB5AD33 1 1 2-maintained XB5AD25 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AD2)

Standard
lever, black 3-maintained XB5AD33 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AD3)
2 —
3-momentary XB5AD53 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AD5)
to center

1 — 2-maintained XB5AJ21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AJ2)

XB5AJ33
Extended 3-maintained XB5AJ33 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AJ3)
19

lever, black
2 —
3-momentary (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AJ5)
XB5AJ53
to center

XB5AG21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AG2)

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

2-maintained
XB5AG33 XB5AG41 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AG4)
1 —
2-momentary (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AG6)
Key (No. to left XB5AG61
455)
INTERFACE

XB5AG03 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AG0)

2 — 3-maintained
XB5AG33 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AG3)

NOTE: The symbol indicates key withdrawal position(s).

For Legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40 and XB5 Legend Inserts Only, page

[28] Trigger action mushroom heads are tamper proof in that a change of contact state is not possible by teasing or floating the operator. For emergency stop applications, always use a trigger
action push button (per EN/IEC 13850).
[29] For contact configurations, see Sequence of Contacts on Selector Switch Bodies , page 19-32.
19-26
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Complete Devices 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.65: Pilot Lights with Protected LED™ (screw clamp terminal connections)
[30]
Supply Monolithic Complete Complete Unit
Shape of Head Voltage Color
Units Units Components
White XB5EVB1 XB5AVB1 (ZB5AVB1 + ZB5AV013)
Green XB5EVB3 XB5AVB3 (ZB5AVB3 + ZB5AV033)
Red XB5EVB4 XB5AVB4 (ZB5AVB4 + ZB5AV043)
24 Vac/Vdc
XB5AVB1 Orange XB5EVB5 XB5AVB5 (ZB5AVB5 + ZB5AV053)
Blue XB5EVB6 XB5AVB6 (ZB5AVB6 + ZB5AV063)
Yellow XB5EVB8 — —
White XB5EVG1 XB5AVG1 (ZB5AVG1 + ZB5AV013)
Green XB5EVG3 XB5AVG3 (ZB5AVG3 + ZB5AV033)
Red XB5EVG4 XB5AVG4 (ZB5AVG4 + ZB5AV043)
110–120 Vac
Orange XB5EVG5 XB5AVG5 (ZB5AVG5 + ZB5AV053)
Blue XB5EVG6 XB5AVG6 (ZB5AVG6 + ZB5AV063)
Yellow XB5EVG8 — —
White XB5EVM1 XB5AVM1 (ZB5AVM1 + ZB5AV013)
Green XB5EVM3 XB5AVM3 (ZB5AVM3 + ZB5AV033)
XB5EVG1 Red XB5EVM4 XB5AVM4 (ZB5AVM4 + ZB5AV043)
230–240 Vac
Orange XB5EVM5 XB5AVM5 (ZB5AVM5 + ZB5AV053)
Blue XB5EVM6 XB5AVM6 (ZB5AVM6 + ZB5AV063)
Yellow XB5EVM8 — —

Table 19.66: Pilot Lights for BA9s Bulb (screw clamp terminal connections)
Shape of Supply
Voltage Color Catalog Number Components
Head
Direct supply, for BA9s (incandescent, LED, neon) V < 250 V, 2.4 W bulb (bulb not included) [31]
White XB5AV61 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV01)
< 250 Vac/ Green XB5AV63 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV03)
Vdc Red XB5AV64 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV04)
Yellow XB5AV65 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV05)
Transformer type with 1.2 VA, 6 V secondary. BA9s incandescent bulb included
XB5AV63 XB5AV34 White XB5AV31 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV01)
110–120 Green XB5AV33 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV03)
Vac
50/60 Hz Red XB5AV34 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV04)
Yellow XB5AV35 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV05)

Table 19.67: Illuminated Push Buttons, Momentary (screw clamp terminal

connections) [30]
Type of
Shape of Descrip- Contact Supply Color Catalog Number Components
Head tion Voltage of Push
N.O. N.C.
Flush

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

White XB5AW31B5 (ZB5AW0B15 + ZB5AW313)
Green XB5AW33B5 (ZB5AW0B35 + ZB5AW333)
XB5AW31B5 24 Vac/ (ZB5AW0B45 + ZB5AW343)
Vdc Red XB5AW34B5
Yellow XB5AW35B5 (ZB5AW0B55 + ZB5AW353)
Blue XB5AW36B5 (ZB5AW0B65 + ZB5AW363)
1 1

INTERFACE
White XB5AW31G5 (ZB5AW0G15 + ZB5AW313)
Green XB5AW33G5 (ZB5AW0G35 + ZB5AW333)
110–120 Red XB5AW34G5 (ZB5AW0G45 + ZB5AW343)
Vac
Yellow XB5AW35G5 (ZB5AW0G55 + ZB5AW353)
Blue XB5AW36G5 (ZB5AW0G65 + ZB5AW363)
XB5AW3465
Direct White XB5AW3165 (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW31)
supply for (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW33)
BA9s < 250 Green XB5AW3365
2.4 W max. 1 1 Vac/Vdc Red XB5AW3465 (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW34)
bulb not
included Yellow XB5AW3565 (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW35)
White XB5AW3135 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW31)
XB5AW3335 Transform- 110–120 Green XB5AW3335 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW33)
er type Vac
For legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40 and XB5 Legend Red XB5AW3435 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW34)

19
1.2 VA, 6 V 50/60 Hz
Inserts Only, page . Yellow XB5AW3535 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW35)
For LEDs, see LED, BA9s Base, page . secondary.
BA9s 1 1
White XB5AW3145 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW31)
incandes- 230–240
cent bulb Green XB5AW3345 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW33)
Vac
included 50/60 Hz Red XB5AW3445 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW34)
Yellow XB5AW3545 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW35)
Extended
White XB5AW11B5 (ZB5AW0B15 + ZB5AW113)
Green XB5AW13B5 (ZB5AW0B35 + ZB5AW133)
24 Vac/ Red XB5AW14B5 (ZB5AW0B45 + ZB5AW143)
Vdc
Yellow XB5AW15B5 (ZB5AW0B55 + ZB5AW153)
Blue XB5AW16B5 (ZB5AW0B65 + ZB5AW163)
1 1
White XB5AW11G5 (ZB5AW0G15 + ZB5AW113)
Green XB5AW13G5 (ZB5AW0G35 + ZB5AW133)
110–120 (ZB5AW0G45 + ZB5AW143)
Red XB5AW14G5
Vac
Yellow XB5AW15G5 (ZB5AW0G55 + ZB5AW153)
Blue XB5AW16G5 (ZB5AW0G65 + ZB5AW163)

[30] For 240V LED, replace the “B” or “G” with “M”. (Example: XB5APVB1 (24 V) to XB5APVM1 (240 Vac only))
[31] For bulb information, refer to BA9s Bulbs and Associated Accessories, page
19-27
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Non-Illuminated Operators
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

XB5 Non-Illuminated Operators

Table 19.68: Non-Illuminated Operators, Momentary—Unmarked
Shape of Head Type of Push Cap Color Catalog Number

Flush, without color cap [32] — ZB5AA0

Flush, with set of 6 color caps 6 colors [33] ZB5AA9

ZB5AA0 ZB5AA5 White ZB5AA1

Black ZB5AA2
Green ZB5AA3
Flush Red ZB5AA4
Yellow ZB5AA5
Blue ZB5AA6
Gray ZB5AA8
ZB5AL3 ZB5AP1 White ZB5AA18
Green ZB5AA38
Flush with transparent cap,
for insertion of legend [34] Red ZB5AA48
Yellow ZB5AA58
Blue ZB5AA68
White ZB5AL1
Black ZB5AL2
Green ZB5AL3
Extended
Red ZB5AL4
ZB5CA2 Yellow ZB5AL5
Blue ZB5AL6
White ZB5APA1
Black ZB5APA2
Booted Flush (clear) Green ZB5APA3
Cap color unobscured Red ZB5APA4
Yellow ZB5APA5
Blue ZB5APA6
White ZB5AP1
Black ZB5AP2
Booted Extended (clear) Green ZB5AP3
Cap color unobscured Red ZB5AP4
Yellow ZB5AP5
Blue ZB5AP6
White ZB5AP1S
Black ZB5AP2S
Booted (colored) Green ZB5AP3S
Cap color unobscured Red ZB5AP4S
Yellow ZB5AP5S
Blue ZB5AP6S
19

White ZB5AP18
Booted (clear) Green ZB5AP38
for insertion of legend [34] Red ZB5AP48
Cap color unobscured Yellow ZB5AP58
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Blue ZB5AP68
White ZB5AA14
Black ZB5AA24
Flush Plunger Green ZB5AA34
(with high guard) Red ZB5AA44
Yellow ZB5AA54
INTERFACE

Blue ZB5AA64
White ZB5CA1
Black ZB5CA2
Green ZB5CA3
Flush
Red ZB5CA4
Yellow ZB5CA5
Blue ZB5CA6
White ZB5CL1
Black ZB5CL2
Green ZB5CL3
Extended
Red ZB5CL4
Yellow ZB5CL5
Blue ZB5CL6
White ZB5AA16
Black ZB5AA26
Heads only Green ZB5AA36
Recessed (high guard) Red ZB5AA46
Yellow ZB5AA56
Blue ZB5AA66
White ZB5CA16
Black ZB5CA26
Heads only Green ZB5CA36
Recessed (high guard) Red ZB5CA46
Yellow ZB5CA56
Blue ZB5CA66

For Legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40 and XB5 Legend Inserts Only, page

[32] Order color cap separately, see XB5 Accessories , page .

[33] Six colored caps included with head (white, black, green, red, yellow, blue).
[34] For legend ordering information see XB5 Accessories, page .
19-28
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Non-Illuminated Operators 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.69: Non-Illuminated Operators, Momentary—Premarked

Marking
Shape of Head Type of Push Cap Color Catalog Number
Text Color
White Green ZB5AA331
I
Black White ZB5AA131
White Green ZB5AA333
START
ZB5AA331 ZB5AA432 Black White ZB5AA133
White Green ZB5AA341
ON
Black White ZB5AA141
T White Green ZB5AA345
Red ZB5AA432
O White
Flush Black ZB5AA232
Red ZB5AA434
STOP White
Black ZB5AA234
ZB5AL232
Red ZB5AA435
OFF White
Black ZB5AA235
UP Black White ZB5AA343
DOWN White Black ZB5AA344
Black White ZB5AA334
[35] White Black ZB5AA335
Red ZB5AL432
O White
Black ZB5AL232
Red ZB5AL434
Extended STOP White
Black ZB5AL234
Red ZB5AL435
OFF White
Black ZB5AL235
I White Green ZB5CA331
Flush
O White Red ZB5CA432

Table 19.70: Mushroom Heads, Momentary

Shape of Head Diameter of Head Color of Head Catalog Number
Black ZB5AC24
Green ZB5AC34
30 mm Red ZB5AC44
Yellow ZB5AC54
Blue ZB5AC64
Black ZB5AC2
Green ZB5AC3
ZB5AC24 ZB5AC2 40 mm Red ZB5AC4
Yellow ZB5AC5
Blue ZB5AC6
Black ZB5AR2
Green ZB5AR3
60 mm Red ZB5AR4
Yellow ZB5AR5
Blue ZB5AR6

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

For legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40 and XB5 Legend Inserts Only, page

INTERFACE
ZB5AR4

19

[35] Cap supplied not clipped-in, allowing orientation of arrow in any one of 4 directions:

19-29
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Non-Illuminated Operators
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.71: Non-Illuminated Push-on/Push-off Operators

Shape of Head Type of Push Color of Push Catalog Number
White ZB5AH01
Black ZB5AH02
Green ZB5AH03
Flush
Red ZB5AH04
Yellow ZB5AH05
ZB5AH04 Blue ZB5AH06
White ZB5AH1
Black ZB5AH2
Green ZB5AH3
Extended
Red ZB5AH4
Yellow ZB5AH5
Blue ZB5AH6
White ZB5CH01
Black ZB5CH02
Green ZB5CH03
Flush
Red ZB5CH04
Yellow ZB5CH05
Blue ZB5CH06

Table 19.72: Two Head Operators, Momentary

Shape of Head Description Marking Cap Color Degree of Catalog
Protection Number
No Marking
Green
— ZB5AA7340
Red
Two flush
White
— ZB5AA7120
Black
IP66
IP69K

ZB5AL7341 ZB5AA7121 One flush Green ZB5AL7340

One extended — Red

Premarked
“I” (white) Green
“O” (white) ZB5AA7341
Red
Two flush
“I” (black) White
“O” (white) ZB5AA7121
Black
IP66
IP69K

One flush “I” (white) Green

One extended “O” (white) Red ZB5AL7341

Without caps
19

Two flush IP66

without caps — — IP69K ZB5AA79
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.73: Three Head Operators, Momentary

Shape of Head Description Marking Cap Color Degree of Catalog
Protection Number
INTERFACE

Premarked
“I” (white) Green
“II” (white) ZB5AA73132
Green
“ ” (white) Green
“ ” (white) Green ZB5AA73133
“ ” (white) Green
“ ” (white) ZB5AA73134
Green
Two flush “+” (white) Green
“-” (white) ZB5AA73135
ZB5AA73133 ZB5AA71124 + one central Green IP66
projecting red push Two flush
“+” (black) White IP69K
marked “Stop” “-” (black) ZB5AA71115
White
“ ” (black) White
“ ” (white) ZB5AA71123
Black
“ ” (black) White
“ ” (white) ZB5AA71124
Black
“ ” (white) Black
“ ” (white) Black ZB5AA72124
Without caps
Two flush IP66
without caps — — ZB5AA791
IP69K

For caps, see XB5 Accessories, page

19-30
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Emergency Stop Operators 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

XB5 Emergency Stop Operators

Table 19.74: Mushroom Heads for Maintained Push Buttons
Shape of Head Type of Push Diameter of Head Color Catalog Number
For use in Emergency Stop applications
30 mm Red ZB5AT844
Trigger action 40 mm Red ZB5AT84
Push-pull [36]
60 mm Red ZB5AX84
30 mm Red ZB5AS834
Trigger action 40 mm Red ZB5AS844
Turn-to-release [36]
60 mm Red ZB5AS864
ZB5AC 30 mm ZB5AS 60 mm 30 mm Red ZB5AS934
Trigger action 40 mm Red ZB5AS944 [37]
Key release
(No. 455) [36] 60 mm Red ZB5AS964
For use in non-Emergency Stop applications
30 mm Black ZB5AT24
40 mm Black ZB5AT2
Push-pull
60 mm Black ZB5AX2
30 mm Black ZB5AS42
Black ZB5AS52
Turn-to-release 40 mm
Yellow ZB5AS55
60 mm Black ZB5AS62
30 mm Black ZB5AS72
Key release 40 mm Black ZB5AS12
(No. 455)
60 mm Black ZB5AS22

Table 19.75: Circular Legends for Emergency Stop Mushroom Heads

(yellow background)
Diameter Text Catalog Number
Blank ZBY8101
90 mm
EMERGENCY STOP ZBY8330
Blank ZBY9121
Emergency Stop ZBY9320
60 mm Bezeled
Prada de Emergencia ZBY9420
Not Halt ZBY9220

For Legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40 and XB5 Legend Inserts, page

ZBY9320

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

[36] Trigger action mushroom heads are tamper proof in that a change of contact state is not possible by teasing or floating the operator. For emergency stop applications, always use a trigger
action push button (per EN/IEC 13850).
[37] Other key numbers:
—key no. 421E: add the suffix 12 to the catalog number.
—key no. 458A: add the suffix 10 to the catalog number.
—key no. 520E: add the suffix 14 to the catalog number.
—key no. 3131A: add the suffix 20 to the catalog number.
Example: The catalog number for a Ø 40 mm red mushroom head for a trigger action, maintained push button, with release by
key no. 421E becomes: ZB5AS94412.
19-31
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Selector Switches
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

XB5 Selector Switches

Table 19.76: Non-Illuminated Selector Switches

Color Number and Type of Positions Standard Lever

[38] Extended Lever
[38]
Catalog Number
Black 2-maintained ZB5AD2 ZB5AJ2
ZB5AD• ZB5AJX• 2-momentary from
Standard Lever Extended Lever Black right to left ZB5AD4 ZB5AJ4

Black 3-maintained ZB5AD3 ZB5AJ3

Black 3-momentary to center ZB5AD5 ZB5AJ5

Black 3-momentary from ZB5AD7 ZB5AJ7

left to center
3-momentary from
Black right to center ZB5AD8 ZB5AJ8

Table 19.77: Non-Illuminated Key Switches

Type of Operator Number and Type of Positions Catalog Number
[39]
ZB5AG2

2-maintained ZB5AG4

ZB5AG• ZB5AG02
2-momentary from
right to left ZB5AG6

ZB5AG0

ZB5AG3
Key (No. 455)
[39]
3-maintained ZB5AG5

ZB5AG9

NOTE: The symbol indicates key withdrawal ZB5AG09

position(s).
19

3-momentary from
left to center ZB5AG1

3-momentary to center ZB5AG7

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

ZB5AG8

3-momentary from right

to center ZB5AG08
INTERFACE

ZB5AG05

Table 19.78: Sequence of Contacts on Selector Switch Bodies

Selector Switches
Unit Type
2-position 3-position
315° 45° 315° 0° 45°
Note:
L=Left, C=Center, R=Right,
O=Open, X=Closed

Up
Operator Plunger
Position Down
Contact Block Location L C R L C R L C R L C R L C R
N.O. O O O X X X X X O O O O O X X
Contacts
N.C. X X X O O O O O X X X X X O O

For Selector Switch Sequence, see Sequence of Contacts on Illuminated Selector Switch Bodies, page 19-19

[38] For colored lever, add the following code to the end of catalog number: 01—white, 03—green, 04—red, 05—yellow, 06—blue (Example: ZB5AD204).
[39] Other key numbers:
—key no. 421E: add the suffix 12 to the catalog number.
—key no. 458A: add the suffix 10 to the catalog number.
—key no. 520E: add the suffix 14 to the catalog number.
—key no. 3131A: add the suffix 20 to the catalog number.
—key no. 8D1: add the suffix D to the catalog number.
Example: The catalog number for a head with key no. 421E for a 2 position maintained, lockable selector switch, with key withdrawal from the left-hand position, becomes: ZB5AG212
19-32
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Specialty Operators 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

XB5 Specialty Operators

Table 19.79: Reset Operators
Actuation Distance Catalog Number
Shape of Head Text Color
in mm
Flush Adjustable Shaft Shaft only (short) is W40437632
Green XB5AA831
Without Red XB5AA841
XB5AA 0.67–4.72 17–120 Blue XB5AA861
O Red XB5AA84101
R Blue XB5AA86102
Green XB5AA832
Without Red XB5AA842
4.72–10.12 120–257 Blue XB5AA862
O Red XB5AA84201
R Blue XB5AA86202
Extended
0.67–4.72 17–120 O Red XB5AL84101
4.72–10.12 120–257 O Red XB5AL84201

Table 19.80: Potentiometer Operator (with Mounting Collar)

Shape of Head Description Application Catalog Number
For potentiometer with For shaft Ø 0.25 in. (6.35
shaft length 1.73 to 1.97 in. mm) ZB5AD922
(44 to 50 mm)
(potentiometer not included) For shaft Ø 0.24 in. (6 mm) ZB5AD912

Table 19.81: Complete Potentiometers

Description Resistance (k Ω) Weight (kg/lb) Catalog Number
+/- 10% linear mode precision 1 0.048/0.106 XB5AD912R1K
complete potentiometer with 4.7 0.048/0.106 XB5AD912R4K7
screw terminals 10 0.048/0.106 XB5AD912R10K
47 0.048/0.106 XB5AD912R47K
100 0.048/0.106 XB5AD912R100K
XB5AD912R1K
470 0.048/0.106 XB5AD912R470K

Table 19.82: Hour Counters (UR E191025, XHNR2 and XHNR8)

Characteristics Supply Voltage Catalog Number
12–24 Vdc or Vac, 50/60 Hz XB5DSB
Indication 0–9999.9
(IP40 NEMA 1) 120 Vac, 60 Hz XB5DSG
230–240 Vac, 50 Hz XB5DSM

Table 19.83: Buzzer (UR E191025, XHNR2 and XHNR8)

XB5DS● Characteristics Supply Voltage Catalog Number

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

85 db buzzer:4kHz, continuous or 24 Vdc or Vac, 50/60 Hz XB5KSB
intermittent
(IP40 NEMA 1) 120 Vac, 60 Hz XB5KSG

Table 19.84: Two Position Toggle Switch

INTERFACE
Shape of Head Color Type of Positions Catalog Number
Black Maintained ZB5AD28
XB5KS●
Black Momentary ZB5AD48

For legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40, XB5 Legend Inserts, page , and Sheets of Legends for Push
Buttons, Switches, and Pilot Lights, page .
ZB5AD28

XB5 Pilot Lights

19
ZB5AV053 ZB5AV01

ZB5CV063

19-33
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Pilot Lights
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.85: Pilot Light Heads

For use with Body Comprising Light Module
Shape of Head Type Color of Lens Catalog Number
White ZB5AV013
Green ZB5AV033
Protected LED™ only Red ZB5AV043
Yellow ZB5AV053
Blue ZB5AV063
White ZB5AV013S
Green ZB5AV033S
Protected LED only Fresnel (jeweled) lens [40] Red ZB5AV043S
Amber ZB5AV053S
Blue ZB5AV063S
White ZB5AV01
Green ZB5AV03
For BA9s incandescent bulb, neon or LED only Red ZB5AV04
[41] Yellow ZB5AV05
Blue ZB5AV06
Clear ZB5AV07
White ZB5AV01S
Green ZB5AV03S
For BA9s incandescent bulb, neon or LED Red ZB5AV04S
Fresnel (jeweled) lens [41] Amber ZB5AV05S
Blue ZB5AV06S
Clear ZB5AV07S

White ZB5CV013
Green ZB5CV033
Protected LED only Red ZB5CV043
Yellow ZB5CV053
Blue ZB5CV063

For legends, refer to XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40, XB5 Legend Inserts, page , and Sheets of Legends for
Push Buttons, Switches, and Pilot Lights, page

Table 19.86: Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Light Module for BA9s
Incandescent Bulb, Neon or LED)
Description Light Source Supply Voltage (V) Catalog Number
Screw clamp terminal connections
Direct supply BA9s bulb 2.4 W max. Not
included [41] <250 ZB5AV6
Direct supply BA9s incandescent, bulb included 24 V 2 W ZB5AV624
Direct supply BA9s incandescent, bulb included 120 V 2.4 W ZB5AV6120
110–120 Vac, 50/60 Hz ZB5AV3
ZB5AV6 ZB5AV3 Transformer type 230–240 Vac, 50/60 Hz ZB5AV4
1.2 VA, 6 V BA9s incandescent bulb included 400–50 Hz ZB5AV5
secondary 440–480 Vac, 60 Hz ZB5AV8
550–600 Vac, 60 Hz ZB5AV9
19

Table 19.87: Complete Bodies

(Mounting Collar + Protected LED™ Light Module) [42][43]
Light Source Supply Voltage Color of Light Source Catalog Number
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Screw clamp terminal connections

White ZB5AVJ1
Green ZB5AVJ3
12 Vac/Vdc Red ZB5AVJ4
Yellow ZB5AVJ5
Blue ZB5AVJ6
INTERFACE

White ZB5AVB1
ZB5AV●● Green ZB5AVB3
24 Vac/Vdc Red ZB5AVB4
Yellow ZB5AVB5
Blue ZB5AVB6
White ZB5AVBG1
Green ZB5AVBG3
24–120 Vac/Vdc Red ZB5AVBG4
Yellow ZB5AVBG5
Blue ZB5AVBG6
White ZB5AVG1
Green ZB5AVG3
110–120 Vac Red ZB5AVG4
Yellow ZB5AVG5
Blue ZB5AVG6
White ZB5AV18B1
Green ZB5AV18B3
Flashing 24 Vac/Vdc Red ZB5AV18B4
Yellow ZB5AV18B5
Blue ZB5AV18B6
White ZB5AV18G1
Green ZB5AV18G3
110–120 Vac Red ZB5AV18G4
Yellow ZB5AV18G5
Blue ZB5AV18G6

[40] For use in bright ambient conditions (i.e., sunlight).

[41] Order bulb separately; see BA9s Bulbs, page . For BA9 LED, see Lamps, BA9s Base, page .
[42] For Quick-Connect version, add “3” to the end of the catalog number Example: ZB5AVJ13 (Quick-Connect size 1 x 0.250" or 2 x 0.110").
[43] For 240 V LED, replace the “B” or “G” with “M”. (Example: ZB5AVB1 (24V) to ZB5AVM1 (240V))
19-34
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Illuminated Operators 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

XB5 Illuminated Operators

Table 19.88: Heads for Momentary Illuminated Push Buttons
Shape of Head Type of Push Color Catalog Number
Only use with Protected LED™ light modules
White ZB5AW313
Green ZB5AW333
Flush Red ZB5AW343
Yellow ZB5AW353
Blue ZB5AW363
White ZB5AW513
ZB5AW313 ZB5AW363
Green ZB5AW533
Flush with clear boot Red ZB5AW543
Yellow ZB5AW553
Blue ZB5AW563
White ZB5AA18
Green ZB5AA38
Flush for insertion of legend Red ZB5AA48
Yellow ZB5AA58
Blue ZB5AA68
White ZB5AW113
ZB5AW143 ZB5CW313 Green ZB5AW133
Extended Red ZB5AW143
Yellow ZB5AW153
Blue ZB5AW163
White ZB5CW313
Green ZB5CW333
Flush for insertion of legend Red ZB5CW343
Yellow ZB5CW353
Blue ZB5CW363
White ZB5CW113
Green ZB5CW133
Extended Red ZB5CW143
Yellow ZB5CW153
Blue ZB5CW163
Only use with light modules for a BA9s incandescent bulb, neon or LED
White ZB5AW31
Green ZB5AW33
Red ZB5AW34
Flush
Yellow ZB5AW35
Blue ZB5AW36
Clear ZB5AW37
White ZB5AW11
Green ZB5AW13
Red ZB5AW14
Extended
Yellow ZB5AW15
Blue ZB5AW16

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Clear ZB5AW17

Table 19.89: Illuminated Push-on/Push-off Operators

Shape of Head Type of Push Color of Lens Catalog Number
Only use with Protected LED light modules

INTERFACE
White ZB5AH013
Green ZB5AH033
Flush Red ZB5AH043
Yellow ZB5AH053
Blue ZB5AH063
ZB5AW33 White ZB5AH13
Green ZB5AH33
Extended Red ZB5AH43
Yellow ZB5AH53
Blue ZB5AH63

For legends, refer to XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40, XB5 Legend Inserts, page , and Sheets of Legends for
Push Buttons, Switches, and Pilot Lights, page

19

19-35
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Illuminated Operators
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.90: Two Button with Clear Pilot Light, Momentary

Shape of Head Description Marking Cap Color Degree of Catalog Number
Protection
No Marking
Green
— Red ZB5AW7A3740
Two flush
White
— ZB5AW7A1720
Black IP66
ZB5AW7A3741 ZB5AW7A1721
IP69K
One flush Green
— ZB5AW7L3740
One extended Red

Premarked
“I” (white) Green
“O” (white) ZB5AW7A3741
Red
Two flush
“I” (black) White
“O” (white) Black ZB5AW7A1721

One flush “I” (white) Green

“O” (white) ZB5AW7L3741
One extended Red
IP66
IP69K
“ ” (black) White
Two flush “ ” (white) ZB5AW7A1724
Black

“+” (black) White

Two flush “-” (black) ZB5AW7A1715
White

Without caps
Two flush without caps — — IP66, IP69K ZB5AW7A9

Table 19.91: Heads for Maintained Illuminated Push Buttons

Shape of Head Type of Push Color Catalog Number
Only use with Protected LED light modules
White ZB5AW713
Green ZB5AW733
Turn-to-Release Mushroom (40
mm) Red ZB5AW743
Yellow ZB5AW753
Blue ZB5AW763
ZB5AW7•
Table 19.92: Emergency Stop, Trigger Action and Mech Latching Push Button with
Mech State Indicator for Elevator Inspection Box Applications—Heads Only
Shape of Head Type of Reset Color Catalog Number
19

Push-pull (40 mm) Red ZB5AT8643M

NOTE: ZB5AT8643M not to be used with ZBZ16* guard.

ZB5AT8643M
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.93: Illuminated Selector Switches, Standard Lever

Shape of Head Number and Type of Positions Catalog Number [44]
Only use with Protected LED light modules
2-maintained ZB5AK12●3
INTERFACE

ZB5AK1213 ZB5AK1463 2-momentary from right to left ZB5AK14●3

3-maintained ZB5AK13●3

3-momentary to center ZB5AK15●3

3-momentary from right to center ZB5AK18●3

3-momentary from left to center ZB5AK17●3

Table 19.94: Sequence of Contacts on Selector Switch Bodies

Selector Switches
Unit Type
2-position 3-position
315° 45° 315° 0° 45°
Note:
L=Left, C=Center, R=Right,
O=Open, X=Closed

Up
Operator Plunger
Position Down
Contact Block Location L C R L C R L C R L C R L C R
N.O. O O O X X X X X O O O O O X X
Contacts
N.C. X X X O O O O O X X X X X O O

For legends, see XB5 Legend Holders, page 19-40, XB5 Legend Inserts, page , and Sheets of Legends for Push
Buttons, Switches, and Pilot Lights, page .
For Caps, see Lens Caps, page

[44] ● Designate color as follows: 1—white, 3—green, 4—red, 5—yellow, 6—blue

19-36
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Electrical Components 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

XB5 Electrical Components

NOTE: For the Quick-Connect version, add the numeral 3 to the end of the number.
Example: ZB5AZ1013 (Quick-Connect size 1 x 0.250" or 2 x 0.110").
Table 19.95: Contact Blocks
(Mounting Collar with Contact Blocks) [45] [46] [47]
Type of Contact
Description Catalog Number
N.O. N.C.
1 — ZB5AZ101
— 1 ZB5AZ102
Screw clamp terminal 2 — ZB5AZ103
connections — 2 ZB5AZ104
ZB5AZ101 1 1 ZB5AZ105
1 2 ZB5AZ141

Table 19.96: Complete Bodies

(Mounting Collar + Single Contact Block + Light Module with Protected LED™)
Type of Contact Supply Voltage [49]
[48]
Light Source Color 24 Vac/Vdc 110–120 Vac
N.O. N.C.
Catalog Number
Screw clamp terminal connections
White ZB5AW0B11 ZB5AW0G11
ZB5AW0••1 Green ZB5AW0B31 ZB5AW0G31
1 — Red ZB5AW0B41 ZB5AW0G41
Yellow ZB5AW0B51 ZB5AW0G51
Blue ZB5AW0B61 ZB5AW0G61
White ZB5AW0B12 ZB5AW0G12
Green ZB5AW0B32 ZB5AW0G32
— 1 Red ZB5AW0B42 ZB5AW0G42
Yellow ZB5AW0B52 ZB5AW0G52
Blue ZB5AW0B62 ZB5AW0G62
White ZB5AW0B13 ZB5AW0G13
Green ZB5AW0B33 ZB5AW0G33
2 — Red ZB5AW0B43 ZB5AW0G43
Yellow ZB5AW0B53 ZB5AW0G53
Blue ZB5AW0B63 ZB5AW0G63
White ZB5AW0B15 ZB5AW0G15
Green ZB5AW0B35 ZB5AW0G35
1 1 Red ZB5AW0B45 ZB5AW0G45
Yellow ZB5AW0B55 ZB5AW0G55
Blue ZB5AW0B65 ZB5AW0G65
For LEDs, see LED, BA9s Base, page .

Table 19.97: Mounting Collar, Contact Block and Light Module

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

(with screw clamp terminal connections)
Type of
Supply Light Source Supply Contact [48] Color of Light Catalog Number
Voltage Source
N.O. N.C.
Screw clamp terminal connections

INTERFACE
BA9s 1 — — ZB5AW061
ZB5AW065 ZB5AW035 Direct supply 2.4 W max. bulb < 250 Vac/ — 1 — ZB5AW062
Not included Vdc 2 — — ZB5AW063
[50] 1 1 — ZB5AW065
Transformer 110–120 Vac 1 — — ZB5AW031
type BA9s 50/60 Hz 1 1 — ZB5AW035
1.2 VA, 6 V incandescent
bulb included 230–240 Vac 1 — — ZB5AW041
secondary 50/60 Hz 1 1 — ZB5AW045

19

[45] For Ring Tongue compatible blocks add “9” to the end of the catalog number (Example: ZB5AZ1029).
[46] Electrical components with connection by printed circuit board pins are available. Refer to Catalog9001CT0001 for more information.
[47] Electrical components with connection by plug-in connector are available. Refer to Catalog 9001CT0001 for more information.
[48] Can be fitted with additional contact blocks, see Table 19.99 Add-On Contact Blocks, page 19-38.
[49] For 240V LED, replace the “B” or “G” with “M”. (Example: change “ZB5AW0B11 (24 V) to ZB5AW0M11 (240 V))
[50] Order bulbs separately, see BA9s Bulbs and Associated Accessories, page
19-37
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Electrical Components
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.98: Body/Mounting Collar

For use with Catalog Number
Electrical block (contact or light module) ZB5AZ009

ZB5AZ009
Table 19.99: Add-On Contact Block (with screw clamp terminal connections) [51][52]
Type of Contact
Description Catalog Number
N.O. N.C.
1 — ZBE101
Standard single contact blocks[53][54]
— 1 ZBE102
2 — ZBE203
Standard double contact blocks[53][54] — 2 ZBE204
1 1 ZBE205
Special contact blocks for low-power switching 1 — ZBE1016
ZBE101 ZBE203 [55] — 1 ZBE1026
Dusty environment 1 — ZBE1016P
Low-power switching [55]
(IP5X, 50 µm dust) — 1 ZBE1026P
Early make
N.O. 1 – ZBE201
Late break
N.C. — 1 ZBE202
Staggered contacts
Overlapping
N.O. + N.C. 1 1 ZB4BZ106
Staggered
N.O. + N.O. — 2 ZB4BZ107

Table 19.100: Light Modules (with screw clamp terminal connections)[51][52]

Description Supply Voltage Color of Light Catalog Number
Source
White ZBVJ1
Green ZBVJ3
12 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVJ4
Yellow ZBVJ5
Blue ZBVJ6
White ZBVB1
Green ZBVB3
ZBVB•
24 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVB4
Yellow ZBVB5
Blue ZBVB6
White ZBVG1
Green ZBVG3
19

110–120 Vac Red ZBVG4

Yellow ZBVG5
Blue ZBVG6
White ZBVBG1
Green ZBVBG3
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

24–120 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVBG4

Yellow ZBVBG5
Blue ZBVBG6
White ZBVM1
Green ZBVM3
INTERFACE

230–240 Vac Red ZBVM4

Yellow ZBVM5
Blue ZBVM6
Direct supply for BA9s
(2.4 W max. bulb not included—see BA9s Bulbs < 250 Vac/Vdc — ZBV6
and Associated Accessories, page )
For LEDs, see LED, BA9s Base, page .

[51] Electrical components with connection by printed circuit board pins are available. Refer to Catalog 9001CT0001 for more details.
[52] Electrical components with connection by plug-in connector are available. Refer to Catalog 9001CT0001 for more details.
[53] For Quick-Connect version add “3” to the end of the catalog number (Example: ZBE1013) (Quick-Connect size 1 x 0.250 in. or 2 x 0.110 in.).
[54] For Ring Tongue compatible blocks add “9” to the end of the catalog number (Example: ZBE1029).
[55] Cannot stack additional contact blocks onto these blocks.
19-38
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5 Electrical Components 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.101: Body/Mounting Collar

For use with Catalog Number
Contact block or light module ZB5AZ009

Table 19.102: Light Modules [56]

ZB5AZ009 Spring Terminal Connections
Description Supply voltage Color of light source Catalog Number
White ZBVJ15
Green ZBVJ35
12 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVJ45
Orange ZBVJ55
Blue ZBVJ65
White ZBVB15
Green ZBVB35
Integral LED (to combine with 24 Vac/Vdc Red ZBVB45
heads for integral LED)
Orange ZBVB55
ZB4BZ1015 Blue ZBVB65
White ZBVG15
Green ZBVG35
110–120 Vac Red ZBVG45
Orange ZBVG55
Blue ZBVG65
White ZBVM15
Green ZBVM35
230–240 Vac Red ZBVM45
Orange ZBVM55
Blue ZBVM65

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

[56] Additional blocks cannot be attached to the back of these contact blocks or light modules. However, spring terminal contact blocks can be mounted behind screw terminal contact blocks.
19-39
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5 Legend Holders
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
www.se.com/us

XB5 Legend Holders

Table 19.103: Standard (30 x 40 mm) Legend Holders for 8 x 27 mm Legends
Legend
Description Catalog Number
Color Text
Without legend [57] — — ZBZ32
With blank legend Black or red background — ZBY2101
(for engraving) White or yellow background — ZBY4101
Custom Legend Black background White ZBY2002
(Specify Engraving) Red background White ZBY2004
ZBZ32 2 lines of 11 characters
(including spaces) White background Black ZBY4001
maximum per line Yellow background Black ZBY4005
O (black background) ZBY2146
O (red background) ZBY2931
With legend marked with I ZBY2147
Black or red background [58] II ZBY2148
international language
O-I ZBY2178
I-II ZBY2179
ZBY•101 I-O-II ZBY2186
AUTO ZBY2115
AUTO-HAND ZBY2364
AUTO-O-HAND ZBY2385
CLOSE ZBY2314
DOWN ZBY2308
EMERGENCY STOP ZBY2330
FAST ZBY2328
FORWARD ZBY2305
ZBY2303 FOR-REV ZBY2371
HAND ZBY2316
HAND-OFF-AUTO ZBY2387
INCH ZBY2321
JOG ZBY2382
LEFT ZBY2310
With legend marked with OFF ZBY2312
Black or red background[58]
English language
OFF-ON ZBY2367
ON ZBY2311
OPEN ZBY2313
POWER ON ZBY2326
RESET (red background) ZBY2323
RESET (black background) ZBY2322
REVERSE ZBY2306
RIGHT ZBY2309
RUN ZBY2334
SLOW ZBY2327
19

START ZBY2303
STOP ZBY2304
STOP-START ZBY2366
UP ZBY2307
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

[57] For legends, see XB5 Legend Inserts Only, page .

[58] Start functions: white letters on black background. Stop functions: white letters on red background (unless otherwise specified above).
19-40
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5R Plastic and XB4R Metal Wireless, 22 mm Push Buttons
Batteryless Push Buttons
www.se.com/us Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN

XB5R Plastic and XB4R Metal Wireless, Batteryless Push Buttons

Table 19.104: Ready-to-use Packs [59]
Voltage
Description Transmitter Type Receiver Type Catalog
Receiver Number
V
Ø 22 mm plastic head
Packs include: + 1 set of 10 different XB5RFA02
- 1 push button/ colored caps Programmable receiver with:
transmitter Ø 22 mm metallic head 24 to 240 - 2 relay outputs type RT 3A[61]
- 1 receiver + 1 set of 10 different XB4RFA02
The push button colored caps
and receiver are Ø 22 mm plastic head Non-programmable receiver XB5RFB01
factory-paired [60] with:
Ø 22 mm metallic head 24 - 1 relay output type RT 3A[62] XB4RFB01
Packs include: Ø 22 mm plastic head Programmable receiver with:
- 1 push button/ + 1 set of 10 different - 2 relay outputs type RT 3A[61] XB5RMA04
transmitter in colored caps 24 to 240
handy box [63]
- 1 receiver Non-programmable receiver
The push button Ø 22 mm metallic head with:
+ 1 operator head XB5RMB03
XB5RFA02 and receiver are 24 - 1 relay output type RT 3A[62]
factory-paired [60]

Table 19.105: Transmitter Components for Wireless, Batteryless Push Buttons

Description Type of Push Cap Color Catalog
Number
1 radio frame sent at the
push of the button — ZBRT1
Transmitter for wireless, Dual Action:
batteryless push buttons [64] 1 radio frame sent at the
[65] push of the button — ZBRT2
1 radio frame sent at
therelease of the button
ZBRT1
White ZB5RTA1
Black ZB5RTA2
Green ZB5RTA3
Green with white “I” ZB5RTA331
Wireless, batteryless push Plastic
Red ZB5RTA4
buttons including: Red with white “O” ZB5RTA432
- a transmitter fitted with
mounting collar Yellow ZB5RTA5
- a spring return push button Blue ZB5RTA6
head with clipped-in cap [66] White ZB4RTA1
Black ZB4RTA2
Metal Green ZB4RTA3
Red ZB4RTA4
Yellow ZB4RTA5

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

[59] Wireless and batteryless push button and receiver, factory-paired.

[60] For additional components, these devices can be field-paired.
[61] Supplied with output function set to momentary. Outputs programmable to maintained and Start-Stop.
[62] Non-programmable momentary output function.
[63] Supplied with a magnet.
[64] Mounting collar ZB5AZ009 (plastic) or ZB4BZ009 (metal) to be ordered separately.
[65] Only heads ZB4RZA0 and ZB5RZA0 are mechanically compatible.
[66] This cap is fitted by Schneider Electric and cannot be removed (risk of damage).
19-41
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB5R Plastic and XB4R Metal Wireless,
Batteryless Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN www.se.com/us

Table 19.106: Programmable Receivers

Description Output Type Voltage Receiver V Catalog
Number
Programmable receivers 4 PNP outputs, 200 mA / 24 V ZBRRC
equipped with: 24
- 2 buttons (“Scroll-through”, 2 relay outputs type
RT 3A [67] ZBRRD
“Ok”) 24 to 240
- 6 indicating LEDs (power ON, 2 relay outputs type
outputs, signal strength) RT 3A [67] ZBRRA
24 to 240
NOTE: Also refer to Access Point for advanced features in programmable receivers.

ZBRRA

Table 19.107: Boxes for Wireless, Batteryless Push Buttons

Description For use with: Marking Sold in Catalog
lots of Number
For mobile and fixed applications with 1 cut-out 1 ZBRM21
Mobile box, plastic, empty wireless and batteryless push buttons 2 cut-outs 1 ZBRM22
[68] Support for tube or wall specific for
ZBRM21 and ZBRM22 — 1 ZBRACS
Empty plastic boxes for For fixed or on-board wireless and 1 cut-out 1 XALD01H7
wireless and batteryless push batteryless push buttons
buttons [69] 2 cut-outs 1 XALD02H7

ZBRM22 ZBRACS XALD02H7

XB5R and XB4R Accessories

Table 19.108: Accessories
Description For use with: Marking Sold in Catalog
lots of Number

Between transmitter and 24 to 240 V

External antenna [70] receiver, used to increase the - 5m cable
range and/or get around 1 ZBRA1
- 1 power-ON LED
obstacles - 2 LEDs
reception/transmission
Plastic 10 ZB5AZ009
Mounting collar –
Metal 10 ZB4BZ009
External antenna access
point Access point (ZBRN1 or ZBRN2) Used to increase the distance of
2 m/6.56 ft cable with 1 RF transmission ZBRA2
connector
19

NOTE: The ZBRN2 has embedded communication port for Modbus Serial Line, where as ZBRN1 must be plugged
ZBRA1 ZBRA2 with a communication module to support different protocols.

ZBRN1 and ZBRN2 Access Points

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

The access point of Harmony® wireless and batteryless range provides network
connectivity openness by operating as an intermediate equipment between the
transmiter and the PLC (Programmable Logic Controller). The access point receives
radio signals from the transmitters and converts them to communication protocols.
Based on the model, it is connected to the PLC using either RS485 ModbusTM Serial line
INTERFACE

or Modbus/TCP protocol.
The access point can be used with transmitters such as XB4R and XB5R wireless and
batteryless push buttons, rope pull switch, mushroom head push button (1), and all PLCs
2 11
1
2 11
1
2 11
1
2
1

2
that support Modbus Serial line over RS485 or Modbus/TCP protocols.
2 11 2
1 2 21
2 11 2
1 2 1
1 2 2

Depending on the application, an external or a relay antenna can be used to improve

1 2 12
2 2
2 1 3
2 2 2 13
2 12 3
2 2 13
1 3
2 2 13
3 2
2 13 4
3 2 41
2 13

signal reception. An access point can support up to 60 radio transmitters

4
3 2 14
1 4
3 2 1
4 4 2
2 14 5
4 2 15
2 14 5
4 2 15
1 5
4 2 1
5 5 2
2 15 6
5 2 16
2 15 6
5 2 1 TM5ACTB1
1 6 6
2 1 TM5ACTB1
5 2
6 6
2 16 TM5ACTB1
2
6
2 1 TM5ACTB1
2

1 TM5A 6 6 2
6 CTB1
2

Radio transmission between 3 transmitters and 1 Access Point

[67] Supplied with output function set to momentary Outputs programmable to maintained and Start-Stop.
[68] Cannot be used for wired contacts (no cable gland outlet).
[69] Box equipped with cable gland outlets, compatible with Harmony ZB5 push button heads.
[70] Not wired to the receiver.
19-42
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB5R Plastic and XB4R Metal Wireless, 22 mm Push Buttons
Batteryless Push Buttons
www.se.com/us Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2121214EN
Table 19.109: Configurable Access Points
Receiver Voltage
Output Type (V) Catalog Number
Description Data Function
Configurable access 2 RS485 connectors
points equipped with: Monostable that provides
- 7-segment display (adjustable from 100 connectivity for ZBRN2
- jog dial ms to 1 s) Modbus RS485 24 to 240
- 8 indicating LEDs Serial line
(power ON, functions
mode,
communication 1 slot for
ZBRN2 status, signal Monostable communication
strength) (adjustable from 100 module ZBRCETH ZBRN1
ms to 1 s) (should be ordered 24 to 240
ZBRN1 - external antenna
connector and separately)
protective plug

Table 19.110: Communication Module

Description Characteristics Communication Port Catalog Number
Modbus/TCP protocol with
embedded Web pages in 5 2 RJ45 connectors that
ZBRCETH Modbus/TCP network languages for provides connectivity for
daisy chain and daisy ZBRCETH
communication module configuration, monitoring
and diagnostics chain loop operation

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

19-43
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB7 Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2120503EN
www.se.com/us

XB7 Push Buttons

Table 19.111: Push Buttons Without Marking
Type of Contact Marking Color of
Shape Type of Sold in Catalog Number
of Head Push Button Push Lots of
N.O. N.C. Text Color Button
Spring return push button without marking
1 — — — White 10 XB7NA11
1 — — — Black 10 XB7NA21
XB7NA31
1 — — — Green 10 XB7NA31
1 — — — Yellow 10 XB7NA81
1 1 — — White 10 XB7NA15
1 1 — — Black 10 XB7NA25
Flush
1 1 — — Green 10 XB7NA35
1 1 — — Red 10 XB7NA45
XB7NL4● 1 1 — — Blue 10 XB7NA65
— 1 — — Red 10 XB7NA42
2 — — — Black 10 XB7NA23
2 — — — Green 10 XB7NA33
— 1 — — Red 10 XB7NL42
Projecting
1 1 — — Red 10 XB7NL45
XB7NH2● Latching push button without marking
1 — — — Black 10 XB7NH21
1 — — — Green 10 XB7NH31
Flush
1 1 — — Black 10 XB7NH25
1 1 — — Green 10 XB7NH35

Table 19.112: Push Buttons With Marking

Shape Type of Type of Contact Marking Color of Sold in
Push Catalog Number
of Head Push Button Text Color Lots of
N.O. N.C. Button
Spring return push button with marking
1 – I White Green 10 XB7NA3131
1 – START White Green 10 XB7NA3133
XB7NA3133 1 – Black White 10 XB7NA11341
1 – White Black 10 XB7NA21343
Flush
1 – White Black 10 XB7NA21341
– 1 STOP White Red 10 XB7NA4234
1 1 STOP White Red 10 XB7NA4534
1 1 Black White 10 XB7NA15341
1 1 O White Red 10 XB7NL4532
XB7NA4234
19

XB7NL4232
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

19-44
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB7 Push Buttons 22 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2120503EN
www.se.com/us

XB7 Illuminated Push Buttons with Projecting Push

Table 19.113: With Integral LED
Shape of Type of push Color of Sold in Unit reference by supply voltage [71]
head and contacts lens lots of 24 V 120 V 230 V
Green 10 XB7NW33B1 — XB7NW33M1
10 XB7NW34B1 XB7NW34G1 XB7NW34M1
Spring return Red
10 XB7NW34B2 — XB7NW34M2
push with N.O. Orange
XB7NW33●1 and N.C. 10 XB7NW35B1 — —
contacts [71] Blue 10 XB7NW36B1 — —
Clear 10 XB7NW37B1 — —
Yellow 10 XB7NW38B1 — —
Green 10 XB7NJ03B1 — XB7NJ03M1
Latching push
Red 10 XB7NJ04B1 — XB7NJ04M1

XB7 Pilot Lights

Table 19.114: With Integral LED
Type of light Catalog Number by supply voltage [72]
Shape of source Sold in
Color of lens
head (included) lots of 24 V 120 V 230 V
Green 10 XB7EV03BP XB7EV03GP XB7EV03MP
Red 10 XB7EV04BP XB7EV04GP XB7EV04MP
XB7EV08●P Yellow 10 XB7EV05BP XB7EV05GP XB7EV05MP
Integral LED
Blue 10 XB7EV06BP XB7EV06GP XB7EV06MP
Clear 10 XB7EV07BP XB7EV07GP XB7EV07MP
Orange 10 XB7EV08BP XB7EV08GP XB7EV08MP

Table 19.115: With BA 9s base fitting

Shape of Sold in Catalog Number[72]
Supply Color of lens
head lots of With bulb Without bulb
With resistor, for Green 10 XB7EV73P —
130 V, 2.6 W Red 10 XB7EV74P —
bulb Yellow 10 XB7EV75P —
Supply voltage:
XB7EV75P 230 V , Orange 10 XB7EV78P —
50-60 Hz
Direct for BA 9s Green 10 – XB7EV63P
base fitting Red 10 – XB7EV64P
incandescent Yellow 10 – XB7EV65P
bulb
Supply voltage: Clear 10 – XB7EV67P
≤ 250 V [73] Orange 10 – XB7EV68P

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

[71] All product references ending in "1" are for products with "NO" contacts (example: XB7NW34B1). All product references ending in "2" are for products with "NC" contacts (example:
XB7NW34B2).
[72] For Faston connection version (1 x 6.35 mm and 2 x 2.8 mm), add the number “3” to the end of the reference. Example: XB7EV07BP becomes XB7EV07BP3.
[73] Bulb characteristics for direct supply pilot lights: 250 V, 2.6 W.
19-45
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 22 mm Push Buttons XB7 Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2120503EN
www.se.com/us

XB7 Selector Switches and Key Switches

Table 19.116: Title
Shape of Type of Type of contact Number and type Sold in Catalog
head operator N.O. N.C. of positions lots of Number
1 — 2, maintained 10 XB7ND21
Standard
handle, 1 1 2, maintained 10 XB7ND25
XB7ND2● XB7NG33 black
2 — 3, maintained 10 XB7ND33

2, key
1 — withdrawal in 10 XB7NG21
Key LH position
(key No.
455) 3, key
2 — withdrawal in 10 XB7NG33
center position
NOTE: The symbol indicates key withdrawal position(s).

XB7 Mushroom Head Push Buttons

Table 19.117: Ø 40 mm Emergency Stop Trigger Action and Mechanically Latching
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
Shape of Type of contact Sold in Catalog
Type of push Standards Color
head N.O. N.C. lots of Numbers
– 1 Red 10 XB7NS8442
1 1 Red 10 XB7NS8445
Turn to release
EN/IEC 60204-1, – 2 Red 10 XB7NS8444
XB7NS84● EN/ISO 13850,
EN/IEC 60947-5- – 1 Red 10 XB7NT842
5, 1 1 Red 10 XB7NT845
Push-pull Machinery
directive 2006/42/ – 2 Red 10 XB7NT844
EC
and UL – 2 Red 10 XB7NS9444
Key release
(n° 455) – 1 Red 10 XB7NS9445

Table 19.118: Circular Legends, Yellow, For Mushroom Head Push Buttons
Used for “Emergency Stop” function [74]
Conforming to Standards Diameter (mm) Marking on Yellow Background Catalog Number
ARRET D’URGENCE ZBY9130
NOT-HALT ZBY9230
60
PARADA DE EMERGENCIA ZBY9430
EN/IEC 60204-1 and ARRESTO DE EMERGENZA ZBY9630
EN/ISO 13850 [74] ARRET D’URGENCE ZBY8130
19

EMERGENCY STOP ZBY8330

90
PARADA DE EMERGENCIA ZBY8430
ARRESTO DE EMERGENZA ZBY8630

ZBY9330
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

[74] For compliance with standard EN/ISO 13850, paragraph 4.4.6, the Emergency stop logo has been added.
19-46
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type K Heavy Duty Operators 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Type K Heavy Duty Operators

Table 19.119: Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators
Operator with Operator with Operator with Operator Only
Description Color 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. 1 N.O. Contact 1 N.C. Contact with No
Contact (KA1) [1] (KA2) [1] (KA3) [1] Contacts [1]
Black KR1BH13 KR1BH5 KR1BH6 KR1B
Red KR1RH13 KR1RH5 KR1RH6 KR1R
Green KR1GH13 KR1GH5 KR1GH6 KR1G
Full Guard
Universal [2] KR1UH13 KR1UH5 KR1UH6 KR1U
Other [3] KR1■H13 KR1■H5 KR1■H6 KR1■
9001KR1B
Black KR3BH13 KR3BH5 KR3BH6 KR3B
Red KR3RH13 KR3RH5 KR3RH6 KR3R
Green KR3GH13 KR3GH5 KR3GH6 KR3G
No Guard
Universal [2] KR3UH13 KR3UH5 KR3UH6 KR3U
Other [3] KR3■H13 KR3■H5 KR3■H6 KR3■
9001KR3B
Black KR2BH13 KR2BH5 KR2BH6 KR2B
Red KR2RH13 KR2RH5 KR2RH6 KR2R
Green KR2GH13 KR2GH5 KR2GH6 KR2G
Extended Guard
Universal [2] KR2UH13 KR2UH5 KR2UH6 KR2U
Other[3] KR2■H13 KR2■H5 KR2■H6 KR2■
9001KR2B
Snap-In Plastic Mushroom Button
Black KR4BH13 KR4BH5 KR4BH6 KR4B
Red KR4RH13 KR4RH5 KR4RH6 KR4R
Red [4] KR4R05H13 KR4R05H5 KR4R05H6 KR4R05
1-3/8 in. (35 mm) Green KR4GH13 KR4GH5 KR4GH6 KR4G
Diameter Other [3] KR4■H13 KR4■H5 KR4■H6 KR4■
Mushroom Button Screw-On Mushroom Button with Set Screw Security, Plastic Head
9001KR4B Black KR24BH13 KR24BH5 KR24BH6 KR24B
Red KR24RH13 KR24RH5 KR24RH6 KR24R
Green KR24GH13 KR24GH5 KR24GH6 KR24G
Other[3] KR24■H13 KR24■H5 KR24■H6 KR24■
Screw-On Metal Mushroom Button with Set Screw Security
1-1/2 in. (40 mm) Black — — — 9001KR24BM
Diameter Red — — — 9001KR24RM
Mushroom Button
Green — — — 9001KR24GM
9001KR24BM
Snap-In Plastic Mushroom Button
Black KR5BH13 KR5BH5 KR5BH6 KR5B
Red KR5RH13 KR5RH5 KR5RH6 KR5R
Red [4] KR5R05H13 [4] KR5R05H5 [4] KR5R05H6 [4] KR5R05 [4]
2-1/4 in. (57 mm) Green KR5GH13 KR5GH5 KR5GH6 KR5G
Diameter Other[3] KR5■H13 KR5■H5 KR5■H6 KR5■
Mushroom Button Screw-On Mushroom Button with Set Screw Security, Plastic Head

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

9001KR5B Black KR25BH13 KR25BH5 KR25BH6 KR25B
Red KR25RH13 KR25RH5 KR25RH6 KR25R
Green KR25GH13 KR25GH5 KR25GH6 KR25G
Other[3] KR25■H13 KR25■H5 KR25■H6 KR25■
Screw-On Metal Mushroom Button with Set Screw Security

INTERFACE
2-3/8 in. (60 mm) Black — — — 9001KR25BM
Diameter Red — — — 9001KR25RM
Mushroom Button
Green — — — 9001KR25GM
9001KR25BM
NOTE: To select contact blocks, light modules, and accessories, see Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62.

Table 19.120: Color Codes

KR1, 2, 3 KR4, 5, 24, 25
Color Place Color Code Place Color Code
in Type Number in Type Number
Blue L L
Yellow Y Y
White W —

19
Orange S S
Gray E —
NOTE: For use in hazardous locations—See Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group, page 19-
64. Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.

[1] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[2] The universal push button operators contain one each of the following color inserts: black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
[3] ■ Choose color code from Table 19.122 Color Codes for Type K Operators, page 19-48.
[4] Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability.
19-47
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons Type K Heavy Duty Operators
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Table 19.121: 30 mm Multifunction Operators

With 1 N.O. &
With 2 N.C. Contacts Without
Description [5] Color (1 KA3, 1 KA5) [6] 1 N.C. Contact
(1 KA1) [6] Contacts [6] [7]
Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Mushroom Operators
3 Position, Plastic Head
1-5/8 in. (40 mm), Screw-0n Red KR8RH25 — KR8R
Momentary Pull Green KR8GH25 — KR8G
Maintained Neutral Other [9] KR8▼H25 — KR8▼
Momentary Push [8]
2 Position, Plastic Head Red [11] — KR9RH13 KR9R
1-5/8 in. (40 mm), Screw-0n Maintained Pull Green — KR9GH13 KR9G
Maintained Push [10] Other [9] — KR9▼H13 KR9▼
2 Position , Plastic Head
KR9R94H13 1-5/8 in. (40 mm),
Set Screw Style Screw-0n Head with Set Screw Red — KR9R94H13 KR9R94
Maintained Pull
Maintained Push [10]
Black — 9001KR9BM94
2 Position,
Metal Head Red — 9001KR9RM94
1-1/2 in. (40 mm) Diameter —
Maintained Pull Green — 9001KR9GM94
Maintained Push
9001KR9RM94
Black — 9001KR9BM95
2 Position, Red — 9001KR9RM95
Metal Head
2-3/8 in. (60 mm) Diameter —
Maintained Pull Green — 9001KR9GM95
Maintained Push
9001KR9RM95
With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. With 2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
Description Color Contact (KA1) Contacts (KA2) Without Contacts
Non-Illuminated Turn-to-Release Mushroom Operators

2 Position,
Plastic Head
Turn-to-Release Red KR16H13 KR16H2 KR16
Trigger Action
9001KR16H2
Trigger Action

Screw-On Plastic Illuminated Push-Pull Mushroom Operators [6] [12] [9]

With Red Knob With Other
and 2 N.C. Color Knob and With Other Color
Description [5] Voltage Contacts 2 N.C. Contacts Knob Without
(1 KA3, 1 KA5) (1 KA3, 1 KA5) Contacts [7]

3 Position Illuminated 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz

Momentary Pull Other—Transformer, LED, KR8P1RH25 KR8P1▼H25 KR8P1▼
Maintained Neutral Flashing [13] KR8P▲RH25 KR8P▲▼H25 KR8P▲▼
Momentary Push[8] Other—Full Voltage, KR8P▲RH25 KR8P▲▼H25 KR8P▲▼
Resistor, Neon [14]
19

With Red[11] With Other Color

Knob & 1 N.O. Knob and 1 N.O. With Other Color
Description [5] Voltage & 1 N.C. Contact & 1 N.C. Contact Knob Without
(KA1) (KA1) Contacts
9001KR9P1
1.625 in. Diameter Knob 110–120 V, 50–60 Hz
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

For 1-3/8 in. or 2-1/4 in. Diameter Knob [5] 2 Position Illuminated Other—Transformer, LED, KR9P1RH13 KR9P1▼H13 KR9P1▼
Includes Type KN379 Maintained Pull Flashing [13] KR9P▲RH13 KR9P▲▼H13 KR9P▲▼
Legend Plate Marked Maintained Push Other—Full Voltage, KR9P▲RH13 KR9P▲▼H13 KR9P▲▼
Pull To Start Push To Stop Resistor, Neon [14]

Table 19.123: Contact Sequences

INTERFACE

Table 19.122: Color Codes for 30 mm

9001 KR8RH1 or H13
Multifunction Operators ▼ Pull Ctr Push
Color KR8, KR9 KA3 X O O
(KA1)
Black [15] B KA2 O O X
Red R
Green G 9001 KR8RH25
Blue L KA3 X O O
Yellow Y KA5 X X O
White W NOTE: To select contact blocks, light modules, and accessories, see Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62.
Orange [15] S
Clear C
Amber A
Gray —

[5] For 1-3/8 in. or 2-1/4 in. Dia. Knob:

a) Order Type -20 or -21 knob from Additional Accessories for Type K and SK Operators, page .
b) Order 9001K54 adapter—allows Type -20 or -21 knob to fit on push pull operators. Voids UL and NEMA 6 rating.
c) Can order assembled operator by adding color code to Type -20 or -21. Example: 9001KR9R would be 9001KR9R20 or 9001KR9R21.
[6] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.
[7] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage, see “H” Codes, page 19-65. Add the chosen “H” number to the end of the operator.
[8] For contact sequences, see Table 19.123 Contact Sequences, page 19-48
[9] ▼ Choose one color from the Color Codes table here, and insert the color code in Type number. Example: KR9 with a yellow knob = KR9Y
[10] For color codes, see Color Codes for 30 mm Multifunction Operators, page 19-48.
[11] To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob—substitute “R05” in place of “R”
[12] ▲ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Table 19.167 Standard Light Modules for Types K, SK, and KX Control Units, page 19-63. Example: KR8P with a 277 V 50– 60 Hz
voltage = KR8P8.
[13] The knob must be the same color as the LED light module chosen, for example, for a green LED, use a green knob.
[14] On neon light modules, use clear knobs only.
[15] These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
19-48
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type K Heavy Duty Operators 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Table 19.124: Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators

With Red Color With Green Color With Other Color
Voltage Cap and 1 N.O. Cap and 1 N.O.
and Style Cap Without
Description and 1 N.C. and 1 N.C.
Frequency Contact Block [17]
Contact (KA1) [16] Contact (KA1) [16] [18] [16]
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K1L1RH13 K1L1GH13 K1L1▼
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K1L7RH13 K1L7GH13 K1L7▼
Full Guard 24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage K1L35RH13 K1L35GH13 K1L35▼
Illuminated Transformer or Flashing K1L■RH13 K1L■GH13 K1L■▼
Push Button
Clear Plastic Top Full Voltage K1L■RH13 K1L■GH13 K1L■ [18]
For other voltages [19]■ Resistor or Neon[20] K1L■RH13 K1L■GH13 K1L■▼
LED [21] K1L■RH13 K1L■GH13 K1L■▼
9001K1L1
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K3L1RH13 K3L1GH13 K3L1▼
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K3L7RH13 K3L7GH13 K3L7▼
Full Guard 24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage K3L35RH13 K3L35GH13 K3L35▼
Illuminated Transformer or Flashing K3L■RH13 K3L■GH13 K3L■▼
Push Button Full Voltage K3L■ [18]
Metal Top K3L■RH13 K3L■GH13
For other voltages [19]■ Resistor or Neon [20] K3L■RH13 K3L■GH13 K3L■▼
LED [21] K3L■RH13 K3L■GH13 K3L■▼
9001K3L1
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K2L1RH13 K2L1GH13 K2L1▼
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K2L7RH13 K2L7GH13 K2L7▼
24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage K2L35RH13 K2L35GH13 K2L35▼
No Guard
Illuminated Transformer or Flashing K2L■RH13 K2L■GH13 K2L■ [18]
Push Button Full Voltage K2L■RH13 K2L■GH13 K2L■▼
For other voltages [19]■
Resistor or Neon [20] K2L■RH13 K2L■GH13 K2L■▼
9001K2L1 LED [21] K2L■RH13 K2L■GH13 K2L■▼
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K2L1R20H13 K2L1G20H13
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K2L7R20H13 K2L7G20H13
1-3/8 in. (35 mm) Full Voltage
Illuminated 24–28 Vac/Vdc K2L35R20H13 K2L35G20H13
Transformer or Flashing Order K2L ■▼
Mushroom, K2L■R20H13 K2L■G20H13 Above [22]
Screw-On Full Voltage K2L■R20H13 K2L■G20H13
Plastic Head For other voltages [19]■
Resistor or Neon [20] K2L■R20H13 K2L■G20H13
9001K2LR20 LED [21] K2L■R20H13 K2L■G20H13
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K2L1R21H13 K2L1G21H13
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer K2L7R21H13 K2L7G21H13
2-1/4 in. (57 mm) Full Voltage
Illuminated 24–28 Vac/Vdc K2L35R21H13 K2L35G21H13
Transformer or Flashing Order K2L■▼
Mushroom, K2L■R21H13 K2L■G21H13 Above [22]
Screw-On Full Voltage K2L■R21H13 K2L■G21H13
Plastic Head For other voltages [19]■
Resistor or Neon [20] K2L■R21H13 K2L■G21H13
9001K2LR21 LED [21] K2L■R21H13 K2L■G21H13
NOTE: To select contact blocks, light modules, and accessories, see Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62.

Table 19.125: Color Caps

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Color Codes▼
Color
K1L, K2L, K3L 1-3/8 in. Mushroom 2-1/4 in. Mushroom
Red R R20 R21
Green G G20 G21
Blue L L20 L21

INTERFACE
Yellow Y Y20 Y21
White W W20 W21
Clear C C20 C21
Amber A A20 A21
NOTE: UL Types 4, 13/NEMA 4, 13 For use in hazardous locations—See Square D Offering According to Class,
Division, and Group, page 19-64. Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.

19

[16] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[17] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage, refer to bullets to the right of “H” Codes, page 19-65. Add the “H” number to the end of the
operator type number. Additional “H” numbers are available.
[18] Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table. Example: K2L25 with a blue 1–3/8 in. mushroom button = K2L25L20.
[19] ■ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard and Shallow Depth Light Modules, page 19-63. Example: K2L with 240 Vac/Vdc = K2L25.
[20] On neon light modules, use clear color caps only.
[21] The cap must be the same color as the LED light module chosen, e.g., for red LED, use red color cap.
[22] The only difference between a no guard (K2L_) operator and mushroom button operator is the color cap.
19-49
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons 9001 K Selector Switches
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

9001K 2-Position Selector Switches

Table 19.126: 2-Position Selector Switches
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open

Contact Block Quantity and Type Mount on Side

Position KA1 or KA2 or KA3 KA1 or KA2 or KA3
Left Right Left Right
KA3 KA3 1 0 0 1
KA1 #2
KA1
or KA2 #2 or
Side 2 KA2
#2 0 1 1 0
Side 1

KA3 KA3
1 0 0 1
KA1 #1
Operator Locating KA1
Notch or KA2 or
#1
KA2
Top View 0 1 1 0
#1
For cam, see Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide, page 19-53. E D

Non-Illuminated Operators Cat. No. [23] Cat. No. [23]

Manual Return [24], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob KS11 KS12
With Knob (select style and color from Table 19.127 Selector Switch Assembly Codes, page 19-50) [25] KS11♦ KS12♦
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code1,2,3) [25] KS11K♦ KS12K♦
Operator with Contact Blocks and Standard black knob
With 1 KA1 on Side #2 KS11BH13 —
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 KS11BH1 —
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 KS11BH2 —
Spring Return from Left [24], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob KS25 —
With Knob (select style and color from Table 19.127 Selector Switch Assembly Codes, page 19-50) [25] KS25♦ —
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 2 only) [26] KS25K2 —
Spring Return from Right [24], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob — KS34
With Knob (select style and color from Table 19.127 Selector Switch Assembly Codes, page 19-50) [25] — KS34♦
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1 only) — KS34K1

Illuminated Operators Cat. No. [23] Cat. No. [23]

Manual Return [24], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K11J1 K12J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K11J1R K12J1R
With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module [27]. [25] K11J■♦ K12J■♦
19

Spring Return from Left [24], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K25J1 —
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K25J1R —
With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module [27]. [25] K25J■♦ —
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Spring Return from Right [24], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer — K34J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer — K34J1R
With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module [27]. [25] — K34J■♦
INTERFACE

Table 19.127: Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No. Table 19.128: Key Withdrawl Codes
Standard Knob Gloved Hand Knob Code Position
Color 1 Left Only
♦ Knob Code Cat. No. [23] ♦ Knob Code Cat. No. [23]
Black B B11 FB B25 2 Right Only
Red R R8 FR R24 70 3 Left and Right
Green G G8 FG G24
Yellow Y Y8 FY Y24
Blue L L8 FL L24
White W W8 FW W24
Amber A A8 FA A24 2 Position
Clear C C8 FC C24 NOTE: To select and order Contact Blocks, Light Modules, Knobs, and Accessories, see
Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62 through Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact
Blocks, page 19-64.

[23] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[24] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. Add the "H code" from “H” Codes, page 19-65 as needed for your application.
[25] ♦ Add the knob color code from Table 19.127 Selector Switch Assembly Codes, page 19-50
[26] Add the key withdrawal code from Table 19.128 Key Withdrawl Codes , page 19-50
[27] ■ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard and Shallow Depth Light Modules, page 19-63. Example: K25J■ with 208Vac = K25J3
19-50
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 9001 K Selector Switches 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

9001K 3-Position Selector Switches

Table 19.129: 3-Position Selector Switches
Contact Block Required 1 - Contact Closed 0- Contact Open

Contact Quantity Mount

Block and on
Position Type Side Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
KA3 KA3
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
KA1 #2
KA1
or KA2 #2 or
Side 2 KA2
Side 1 #2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

KA3 KA3 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
KA1 #1
Operator Locating KA1
Notch or KA2 #1 or
KA2
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Top View #1
For cam,
see Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide, page 19-53. B C D E F G J L M
Non-Illuminated Operators [28] Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
Manual Return, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob KS42 KS43 KS44 KS45 KS46 KS47 KS49 KS401 KS402
With Knob ♦[30] KS42♦ KS43♦ KS44♦ KS45♦ KS46♦ KS47♦ KS49♦ KS401♦ KS402♦
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4 through 10) ▼[31] KS42K▼ KS43K▼ KS44K▼ KS45K▼ KS46K▼ KS47K▼ KS49K▼ KS401K▼ KS402K▼
Operator with Contact Blocks and Standard black knob [32]
With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13) KS42B- KS43B- KS44B- KS45BH13 KS46BH13 KS47BH13 KS49BH13 KS401B- KS402B-
H13 H13 H13 H13 H13
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1) KS42BH1 KS43BH1 KS44BH1 KS45BH1 KS46BH1 KS47BH1 KS49BH1 KS401BH1 KS402BH1
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2) KS42BH2 KS43BH2 KS44BH2 KS45BH2 KS46BH2 KS47BH2 KS49BH2 KS401BH2 KS402BH2
Spring Return from Left to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob KS62 KS63 KS64 KS65 KS66 KS67 KS69 KS601 KS602
With Knob ♦[30] KS62♦ KS63♦ KS64♦ KS65♦ KS66♦ KS67♦ KS69♦ KS601♦ KS602♦
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5, 6 or 9 only) ▼[31] KS62K▼ KS63K▼ KS64K▼ KS65K▼ KS66K▼ KS67K▼ KS69K▼ KS601K▼ KS602K▼
Spring Return from Right to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob KS72 KS73 KS74 KS75 KS76 KS77 KS79 KS701 KS702
With Knob ♦[30] KS72♦ KS73♦ KS74♦ KS75♦ KS76♦ KS77♦ KS79♦ KS701♦ KS702♦
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4, 5 or 7 only) ▼[31] KS72K▼ KS73K▼ KS74K▼ KS75K▼ KS76K▼ KS77K▼ KS79K▼ KS701K▼ KS702K▼
Spring Return from Both Sides to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob KS52 KS53 KS54 KS55 KS56 KS57 KS59 KS501 KS502
With Knob ♦[30] KS52♦ KS53♦ KS54♦ KS55♦ KS56♦ KS57♦ KS59♦ KS501♦ KS502♦
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4, 5 or 7 only) ▼[31] KS52K▼ KS53K▼ KS54K▼ KS55K▼ KS56K▼ KS57K▼ KS59K▼ KS501K▼ KS502K▼

Illuminated Operators [28] Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
Manual Return, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K42J1 K43J1 K44J1 K45J1 K46J1 K47J1 K49J1 K401J1 K402J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K42J1R K43J1R K44J1R K45J1R K46J1R K47J1R K49J1R K401J1R K402J1R

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module ■[33] ♦[30] K42J■♦ K43J■♦ K44J■♦ K45J■♦ K46J■♦ K47J■♦ K49J■♦ K401J■♦ K402J■♦
Spring Return from Left to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K62J1 K63J1 K64J1 K65J1 K66J1 K67J1 K69J1 K601J1 K602J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K62J1R K63J1R K64J1R K65J1R K66J1R K67J1R K69J1R K601J1R K602J1R

INTERFACE
With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module ■[33] ♦[30] K62J■♦ K63J■♦ K64J■♦ K65J■♦ K66J■♦ K67J■♦ K69J■♦ K601J■♦ K602J■♦
Spring Return from Right to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K72J1 K73J1 K74J1 K75J1 K76J1 K77J1 K79J1 K701J1 K702J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K72J1R K73J1R K74J1R K75J1R K76J1R K77J1R K79J1R K701J1R K702J1R
With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module ■[33] ♦[30] K72J■♦ K73J■♦ K74J■♦ K75J■♦ K76J■♦ K77J■♦ K79J■♦ K701J■♦ K702J■♦
Spring Return from Both Sides to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [29]
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K52J1 K53J1 K54J1 K55J1 K56J1 K57J1 K59J1 K501J1 K502J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K52J1R K53J1R K54J1R K55J1R K56J1R K57J1R K59J1R K501J1R K502J1R
With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module ■[33] ♦[30] K52J■♦ K53J■♦ K54J■♦ K55J■♦ K56J■♦ K57J■♦ K59J■♦ K501J■♦ K502J■♦

Table 19.130: Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No. ♦ Table 19.131: Key Withdrawal Codes [34]
Standard Knob Gloved Hand Knob Code Position
Color Cat. No. 4 Left Only

19
[30] Knob Code Cat. No. [28] [30] Knob Code
[28] 5 Center Only
Black B B11 FB B25 6 Right Only
Red R R8 FR R24 70 70
7 Left and Center
Green G G8 FG G24
8 Left and Right
Yellow Y Y8 FY Y24
Blue L L8 FL L24 9 Center and Right
White W W8 FW W24 10 Left, Center, and Right
Amber A A8 FA A24 3 Position
Clear C C8 FC C24 NOTE: To select and order Contact Blocks, Light Modules, Knobs, and Accessories, see
Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62 through Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact
Blocks, page 19-64.

[28] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[29] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. Add the "H code" from “H” Codes, page 19-65 as needed for your application.
[30] ♦ Add the knob color code from Table 19.130 Selector Switch Assembly Code, page 19-51. For LED, knob color must match LED.
[31] ▼ Add the key withdrawal code from Key Widthdrawl Codes table. Example: KS43K with key withdrawal in the right position only = KS43K6.
[32] For other color knobs replace the B with knob color code from the Selector Switch Assembly Code table.
[33] ■ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from page 19–86.
[34] Add the key withdrawal code from Key Widthdrawl Codes table. Example: KS43K with key withdrawal in the right position only = KS43K6.
19-51
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons 9001 K Selector Switches
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

9001K 4-Position Selector Switches

Table 19.132: 4-Position Selector Switches
Contact Block Required
Quantity and Type Mount on Side 1—Contact Closed
Contact Block Position KA1 or KA2 or KA3 KA1 or KA2 or KA3 0—Contact Open
KA3 KA3
KA1 #2 1 0 0 0
KA1
or KA2 or
#2
Side 2 KA2
Side 1 #2 0 0 1 0

KA3 KA3
0 0 0 1
KA1 #1
Operator Locating KA1
Notch or KA2 #1 or
KA2
#1 0 1 0 0
Top View
For cam, see Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide, page 19-53. H

Non-Illuminated Operators Cat. No. [35]

Manual Return [36], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob KS88
With Knob♦[37] KS88♦
Key Operated with E10 Key (Codes 11, 12, 13, 14, 15) KS88K[38]

Illuminated Operators Cat. No. [35]

Manual Return [36], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K88J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer K88J1R
With Other Color Knob and other voltage Light Module ■[39] ♦[37][40] K88J■♦

Table 19.133: Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No. Table 19.134: Key Withdrawl Codes
Standard Knob Gloved Hand Knob Code Position
Color
Knob Code Cat. No. Knob Code Cat. No. 11 1 and 4
Black B B11 FB B25 46 12 4 only
Red R R8 FR R24 47 47 13 1 only
Green G G8 FG G24 14 1, 2, 3 and 4
Yellow Y Y8 FY Y24 2, 3, and 4
15
Blue L L8 FL L24 4 Position
White W W8 FW W24
NOTE: To select and order Contact Blocks, Light Modules, Knobs, and Accessories, see
Amber A A8 FA A24 Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62 through Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact
Clear C C8 FC C24 Blocks, page 19-64.

Potentiometers with Dial Plate

Table 19.135: Potentiometers with Dial Plate (not UL listed)—Maximum Voltage 300
19

Vac
Power Description Ratings Type
Operator Only, for Single Potentiometer K20
2W NEMA 4, 13
Operator with Single Potentiometer K21
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.136: Potentiometer Suffixes

Single Potentiometer
Suffix [41] Resistance Suffix [41] Resistance
01 50 Ω 07 5 kΩ
INTERFACE

02 100 Ω 08 10 kΩ
04 500 Ω 09 25 kΩ
05 1 kΩ 13 500 kΩ
39 2 kΩ 37 750 kΩ
06 2.5 kΩ 14 1 MΩ
Tandem Potentiometer
Resistance
Suffix [41]
Front Rear
82 1 kW 1 kW
NOTE: Any potentiometer with a shaft 7/8" long and 1/4" diameter may be used with these operators.

[35] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[36] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. Add the "H code" from “H” Codes, page 19-65 as needed for your application.
[37] ♦ Add the knob color code from the Selector Switch Assembly Code table. For LED, knob color must match LED.
[38] Add the key withdrawal code from the Key Withdrawl Codes table.
[39] ■ Add the key withdrawal code from Key Widthdrawl Codes table. Example: KS43K with key withdrawal in the right position only = KS43K6.
[40] Add the knob color code from the Selector Switch Assembly Code table. For LED, knob color must match LED.
[41] For the complete part number, add the suffix from Table 19.136 Potentiometer Suffixes, page 19-52 to the catalog number. Example: 9001K2105.
19-52
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide

Table 19.137: 2 Position Selector Switch
Selection If you require
Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selector switch to contact sequence—
meet almost any combination of contact sequences. Use Contact Mount on
Use Cam Type
Block Type side no. [42]
Step No. 1
Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a target table like E KA3 1 or 2
the one shown for the example below. 1 0
D KA2 1 or 2
Contact Sequence E KA2 1 or 2
0—contact open 1— 0 1
contact closed D KA3 1 or 2
A 1 0 0
B 0 1 0 Table 19.138: 3 Position Selector Switch
C 0 0 1 If you require
Step No. 2 contact sequence— Use Contact Mount on
Look for a cam type common to all sequences in: Use Cam Type
Block Type side no. [42]
Table 19.137 2 Position Selector Switch, page 19-53,
Table 19.138 3 Position Selector Switch, page 19-53, or
Table 19.139 4 Position Selector Switch, page 19-53. G M KA2 1
For the example above, Table 19.138 3 Position Selector Switch, page L KA2 2
19-53 would be used. C E KA3 1
For the contact sequences A (1 0 0), B (0 1 0) and C (0 0 1) of 1 0 0
the example above, cam types F and L are common to all B C E F G J KA3 2
three sequences. B G J KA5 [43] 2
D E J L KA2 1
Step No. 3
D E KA2 2
Next, use the cam type common to all the sequences (if several cam 0 1 0
types are common, choose one) to find the operator type number. Go F KA3 1
to the proper reference topic as indicated in the table below: L KA3 2
C F KA2 1 or 2
Number of Push Button Reference topics B D G L KA3 1
Positions Line 0 0 1 D KA3 2
Type K, page 19-50 B KA5[43] 1
Type K, Type SK, page 19-58
2 Type SK, “H” Numbers, page 19-65 M KA2 2
Type KX Type KX with Contacts, page B KA2 1
Type KX without Contacts, page 1 1 0 C F KA5 [43] 1 or 2
Type K, page 19-51 M KA3 2
Type K, Type SK, page 19-59 B G J KA2 2
3 Type SK, “H” Numbers, page 19-65
Type KX Type KX with Contacts, page G KA5[43] 1
0 1 1
Type KX without Contacts, page L KA5 [43] 2
Type K, Type K, page 19-52 M KA3 1
4 Type SK, Type SK, page 19-60 J KA3 1
Type KX Type KX, page D E J L KA5[43] 1
1 0 1
D E KA5[43] 2
If for the example above a manual return operator with a standard
black knob is required and:
The F cam type is chosen, the operator type number is: Table 19.139: 4 Position Selector Switch
• Type K—Class 9001 Type KS46B, page 19-51 If you require
contact sequence—
• Type SK—Class 9001 Type SKS46B, page 19-59 Use Cam Type
Use Contact
Block Type
Mount on
side no. [42]

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

• Type KX—Class 9001 Type KXSDFB, page
The L cam type is chosen, the operator type number is: (A) KA3
1 0 0 0 H 2
• Type K—Class 9001 Type KS401B, page 19-51 0 1 0 0 H (B) KA2 1
• Type SK—Class 9001 Type SKS401B, page 19-59 0 0 1 0 H (C) KA2 2
•

INTERFACE
Type KX—Class 9001 Type KXSDLB, page 0 0 0 1 H (D) KA3 1
Step No. 4: 1 0 0 1 H A & D Wired in Parallel
Determine the contact blocks required by using the same table in Step 1 1 0 0 H A & B Wired in Parallel
No. 2. 0 1 1 0 H B & C Wired in Parallel
If, for the example above, the F cam type is chosen: 0 0 1 1 H C & D Wired in Parallel
• Use a 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 for sequence A (1 0 0). 1 1 1 0 H A, B & C Wired in Parallel
• Use a 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 for sequence B (0 1 0). 0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
H
H
B, C & D Wired in Parallel
A & C Wired in Parallel
• Use a 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 for sequence
C (0 0 1). 0 1 0 1 H B & D Wired in Parallel
1 1 0 1 H KA5 [43] 2
If, for the example above, the L cam type is chosen:
1 0 1 1 H KA5 [43] 1
• Use a 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 for sequence A (1 0 0).
NOTE: For Outline Dimensions see Catalog 9001CT1103
• Use a 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001KA3 mounted on
side no. 2 for sequence B (0 1 0). NOTE: When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

19
•OneUse a 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 for sequence C (0 0 1).
Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of one Type KA1 = KA3 + KA2
KA2 single circuit block plus one Type KA3 single circuit block
mounted on the same side. = +

When ordering, please specify:

• Quantity
• Class Number
• Type or Catalog Number

For “H” Numbers, see Type K, SK, and KX Contact Block “H” Numbers, page 19-65

[42] See Type K, SK, and KX Contact Block “H” Numbers, page 19-65
[43] Type KA5 must be the last block on either side. If more than one KA5 is required on either side—contact your local Square D sales office.
19-53
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons Type K Heavy Duty Pilot Lights
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Type K Heavy Duty Pilot Lights

When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

Table 19.140: Pilot Lights—UL Types 4, 13/NEMA 4 & 13[44][45]

With Red With Green With Other Without
Description Voltage Style Fresnel Color Fresnel Color Color Cap
Color Cap [46] [47]
Cap [46] Cap [46] [46]
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KP1R31 KP1G31 KP1■ KP1
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KP7R31 KP7G31 KP7■ KP7
24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage KP35R31 KP35G31 KP35■ KP35

For other voltages

see Standard and Shallow Transformer, Flashing or LED [48] KP▲R31 KP▲G31 KP▲■ KP▲
Depth Light Modules, page Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor [49] KP▲R31 KP▲G31 KP▲■ KP▲
Standard Pilot Light 19-63.
(Plastic Fresnel Color
Cap Shown)
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KT1R31 KT1G31 KT1■ KT1
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KT7R31 KT7G31 KT7■ KT7
24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage KT35R31 KT35G31 KT35■ KT35

For other voltages

see Standard and Shallow Transformer, Flashing or LED [48] KT▲R31 KT▲G31 KT▲■ KT▲
Depth Light Modules, page Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor [49] KT▲R31 KT▲G31 KT▲ KT▲
Push-To-Test Pilot Light 19-63.
(Glass Color Cap Shown)
120 Vac Only
Resistor [50] KTR38R31 KTR38G31 KTR38■ KTR38
24–28 Vac Only Full Voltage [50]
for other voltages KTR35R31 KTR35G31 KTR35■ KTR35

See Standard and Shallow

Depth Light Modules, page Full Voltage or Resistor [50] KTR▲R31 KTR▲G31 KTR ▲■ KTR▲
19-63.[50]
Remote Test Pilot Light
(Glass Color Cap Shown)

Table 19.141: Color Caps

Plastic Fresnel Plastic Domed Glass

Color

Amber A31 A9 A6
Blue L31 L9 L6
Clear C31 C9 C6
Green G31 G9 G6
19

Red R31 R9 R6
White W31 W9 W6
Yellow Y31 Y9 Y6

Typical Wiring Diagram

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

L1 L2 L1 TEST BUTTON L2
START M (TEST) C L2
O.L.
1 STOP 2 3
M L1 M1
STOP START
(SIG)
INTERFACE

M L2
(TEST) C L2

R LSI
L1 M2
(SIG)
C

Test (TEST) C L2
L1
M3 L1 CR
(SIG)
Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Remote Test Pilot Light

For Contact Blocks, see Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62

For Light Modules, see Standard and Shallow Depth Light Modules, page 19-63
For Accessories, see Type K and SK Accessories, page

[44] For use in hazardous locations, see Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group, page 19-64
[45] Legend plates not included.
[46] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.
[47] ■ Add the color code as chosen from Table 19.141 Color Caps, page 19-54. EXAMPLE: KP1 with a blue fresnel cap = KP1L31
[48] The cap must be the same color as the LED light module chosen, e.g., for green LED, use green color cap.
[49] On neon light modules, use clear color caps only.
[50] On remote test pilot lights use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes. Do not choose LED (exception - these LED codes are allowed: 38LG, 38LL, 38LR, 38LW, 38LY), neon or
transformer codes. For AC use only.
19-54
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type SK Corrosion Resistant Non- 30 mm Push Buttons
Illuminated Operators
www.se.com/us Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103

30 mm Momentary Push Button Operators, UL Types 4, 4X, 13/

NEMA 4, 4X, 13
Table 19.142: Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators[51]
Operator with Operator with Operator with
1 N.O. and 1 N.O. Contact 1 N.C. Contact Operator Only
Description Color
1 N.C. Contact (KA1) (KA2) (KA3) No Contacts [52]
Black SKR1BH13 SKR1BH5 SKR1BH6 SKR1B
Red SKR1RH13 SKR1RH5 SKR1RH6 SKR1R
Green SKR1GH13 SKR1GH5 SKR1GH6 SKR1G
Universal [53] SKR1UH13 SKR1UH5 SKR1UH6 SKR1U

9001SKR1B Other [54] SKR1■H13 SKR1■H5 SKR1■H6 SKR1■

Full Guard
Black SKR3BH13 SKR3BH5 SKR3BH6 SKR3B
Red SKR3RH13 SKR3RH5 SKR3RH6 SKR3R
Green SKR3GH13 SKR3GH5 SKR3GH6 SKR3G
Universal [53] SKR3UH13 SKR3UH5 SKR3UH6 SKR3U

Other [54] SKR3■H13 SKR3■H5 SKR3■H6 SKR3■

9001SKR3B
No Guard
Black SKR2BH13 SKR2BH5 SKR2BH6 SKR2B
Red SKR2RH13 SKR2RH5 SKR2RH6 SKR2R
Green SKR2GH13 SKR2GH5 SKR2GH6 SKR2G
Universal [53] SKR2UH13 SKR2UH5 SKR2UH6 SKR2U

9001SKR2B Other [54] SKR2■ SKR2■H5 SKR2■H6 SKR2■

Extended Guard
Snap-In Mushroom Button
Black SKR4BH13 SKR4BH5 SKR4BH6 SKR4B
Red SKR4RH13 SKR4RH5 SKR4RH6 SKR4R
Red [55] SKR4R05H13 SKR4R05H5 SKR4R05H6 SKR4R05
Green SKR4GH13 SKR4GH5 SKR4GH6 SKR4G
Other [56] SKR4▲H13 SKR4▲H5 SKR4▲H6 SKR4▲
Screw-On Mushroom Button with Set Screw Security
9001SKR4B Black SKR24BH13 SKR24BH5 SKR24BH6 SKR24B
1-3/8 in. (35 mm) Red SKR24RH13 SKR24RH5 SKR24RH6 SKR24R
Mushroom Button Green SKR24GH13 SKR24GH5 SKR24GH6 SKR24G
Other [56] SKR24▲H13 SKR24▲H5 SKR24▲H6 SKR24▲
Snap-In Mushroom Button, Plastic Head
Black SKR5BH13 SKR5BH5 SKR5BH6 SKR5B
Red SKR5RH13 SKR5RH5 SKR5RH6 SKR5R
Red [55] SKR5R05H13 SKR5R05H5 SKR5R05H6 SKR5R05
Green SKR5GH13 SKR5GH5 SKR5GH6 SKR5G
Other [56] SKR5▲H13 SKR5▲H5 SKR5▲H6 SKR5▲

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Screw-On Mushroom Button with Set Screw Security, Plastic Head
Black SKR25BH13 SKR25BH5 SKR25BH6 SKR25B
9001SKR5 Red SKR25RH13 SKR25RH5 SKR25RH6 SKR25R
2-1/4 in. (57 mm)
Mushroom Button Green SKR25GH13 SKR25GH5 SKR25GH6 SKR25G
Other [56] SKR25▲H13 SKR25▲H5 SKR25▲H6 SKR25▲

INTERFACE
Table 19.143: Color Codes
■ SKR1, 2, 3 Place Color Code in Type ▲ SKR4, 5, 24, 25 Place Color Code in Type
Color
Number Number
Blue L L
Yellow Y Y
White W —
Orange S S
Gray E —

NOTE: To select and order Contact Blocks, Light Modules, Knobs, and Accessories, see Type KA Contact Blocks,
page 19-62 through Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64.
NOTE: For use in hazardous locations—See Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group, page 19-
64. Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.

19

[51] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[52] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage, see “H” Codes, page 19-65. Add the “H” number to the end of the operator type number.
[53] The universal push button operators include one each of the following color inserts: black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
[54] ■ See Table 19.143 Color Codes , page 19-55.
[55] Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability.
[56] ▲ See Table 19.143 Color Codes , page 19-55.
19-55
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons Type SK Corrosion Resistant Multifunction
Operators
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103 www.se.com/us

30 mm Multifunction Operators UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA 4, 4X, 13

Table 19.144: Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Screw-on Mushroom Operators, Plastic Head[57]
With 2 N.C. With 1 N.O. / 1 N.C.
Description Color Contacts Without Contacts [58]
Contact (1 KA1)
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
3 Position

Red SKR8RH25 — SKR8R

Momentary Pull-
Maintained Neutral- SKR8GH25 — SKR8G
Momentary Push [59] Green

Other [60] SKR8▲H25 — SKR8▲

2 Position[61]

Red — SKR9RH13 SKR9R

9001SKR9R — SKR9GH13 SKR9G
Non-Illuminated Maintained Pull- Green
1-5/8 in. Diameter Knob Maintained Push
Includes Type KN179WP
Legend Plate Marked Other [60] — SKR9▲H13 SKR9▲
Pull To Start Push To Stop

Table 19.145: Non-Illuminated Turn-to-Release Mushroom Operators[57]

With 1 N.O. With 2 N.O. / 2 N.C.
Description Color Contact Contacts Without Contacts
(KA1) (2 KA1)

2 Position,
Plastic Head
Turn-to-Release Red SKR16H13 SKR16H2 SKR16
Trigger Action
9001SKR16H2

Table 19.146: Screw-On Plastic Illuminated Push-Pull Mushroom Operators[57]

With Red Knob and 2 N.C. With Other Color
With Other Color Knob
Description Voltage Contacts and 2 N.C. Contacts Knob Without
Illuminated Contacts [58]
(1 KA3, 1 KA5) [62] [60] [62] [60] [62]
3 Position
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz SKR8P1RH25 SKR8P1▲H25 SKR8P1▲
Momentary Pull- Other—Transformer, LED,
Maintained Neutral- Flashing [64] SKR8P♦RH25 SKR8P♦▲H25 SKR8P♦▲
Momentary Push [63] Other—Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon [59] SKR8P♦RH25 SKR8P♦▲H25 SKR8P♦▲
With Other Color Knob With Other Color
19

With Red [61] Knob and 1 and 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Knob Without
Description Voltage N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1) Contact (KA1) Contacts
[60] [60]
9001SKR9P1 2 Position
Illuminated
1-5/8 in. Diameter Knob 110–120 V, 50–60 Hz SKR9P1RH13 SKR9P1▲H13 SKR9P1▲
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Includes Type KN179WP Legend Other—Transformer, L.E.D.,

Maintained Pull- Flashing [64] SKR9P♦RH13 SKR9P♦▲H13 SKR9P♦▲
Plate Marked Maintained Push
Pull to Start Push To Stop Other—Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon [59] SKR9P♦RH13 SKR9P♦▲H13 SKR9P♦▲

Table 19.147: Color Codes

INTERFACE

Color SKR11, SKR12 SKR8, SKR9

Black [65] B B
Red R R
Green G G
Blue L L
Yellow Y Y
White W W
Orange [65] S S
Clear — C
Amber — A
Gray E —

Table 19.148: Positions for 9001SKR8RH1 or H13 Table 19.149: Positions for 9001SKR8H25
9001SKR8RH1 or H13 9001SKR8H25
PULL CTR PUSH PULL CTR PUSH
KA3 X O O KA3 X O O
(KA1)
KA2 O O X KA5 X X O
KA2 O O X

NOTE: To select and order Contact Blocks, Light Modules, Knobs, and Accessories, see Type KA Contact Blocks, page 19-62 through
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64.

[57] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[58] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage, see “H” Codes, page 19-65. Add the chosen “H” number to the end of the operator.
[59] On neon light modules, use clear knobs only.
[60] ▲ See Table 19.147 Color Codes, page 19-56 and insert the color code in the Type number. Example: SKR9( ) with a yellow knob = SKR9Y
[61] To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob—substitute “R05” in place of “R”
[62] ♦ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard and Shallow Depth Light Modules, page 19-63. Example: SKR8P♦ with 277 V 50–60 Hz = SKR8P8
[63] For positions, refer to Table 19.148 Positions for 9001SKR8RH1 or H13, page 19-56 and Table 19.149 Positions for 9001SKR8H25, page 19-56.
[64] The knob must be the same color as the LED light module chosen, for example, for a green LED, use a green knob.
[65] These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
19-56
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type SK Corrosion Resistant Illuminated 30 mm Push Buttons
Operators
www.se.com/us Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103

Type SK Corrosion Resistant Illuminated Operators

Table 19.150: Illuminated Push Button Operators
With Other
With Red Color Cap and With Green Color Cap Color Cap
Voltage and
Description Frequency Style 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Contact and 1 N.O.and 1 N.C. Without
(KA1) [66] Contact (KA1) [66] Contact Blocks
[67] [66]
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK1L1RH13 SK1L1GH13 SK1L1
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK1L7RH13 SK1L7GH13 SK1L7
24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage SK1L35RH13 SK1L35GH13 SK1L35
Full Guard
Illuminated Transformer, Flashing SK1L■RH13 SK1L■GH13 SK1L ■
Push Button For other voltages Full Voltage SK1L■RH13 SK1L■GH13 SK1L ■
See Table [68] Resistor, Neon [69] SK1L■RH13 SK1L■GH13 SK1L ■

9001SK1L1 LED [70] SK1L■RH13 SK1L■GH13 SK1L ■ [71]

110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK2L1RH13 SK2L1GH13 SK2L1
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK2L7RH13 SK2L7GH13 SK2L7
24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage SK2L35RH13 SK2L35GH13 SK2L35
No Guard Transformer, Flashing SK2L■RH13 SK2L■GH13 SK2L ■
Illuminated
Push Button Full Voltage SK2L■RH13 SK2L■GH13 SK2L ■
For other voltages
See Table [68] Resistor, Neon [69] SK2L■RH13 SK2L■GH13 SK2L ■
LED[70] SK2L■RH13 SK2L■GH13 SK2L ■ [71]
9001SK2L1
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK2L1R20H13 SK2L1G20H13
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK2L7R20H13 SK2L7G20H13
1-3/8 in. 24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage SK2L35R20H13 SK2L35G20H13
(35 mm)
Illuminated Transformer, Flashing SK2L■R20H13 SK2L■G20H13 Order SK2L■
Mushroom, Full Voltage SK2L■R20H13 SK2L■G20H13 [71][72]
Screw-On For other voltages Resistor, Neon [69]
See Table [68] SK2L■R20H13 SK2L■G20H13
Plastic Head
LED [70] SK2L■R20H13 SK2L■G20H13
9001SK2L1R20
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK2L1R21H13 SK2L1G21H13
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer SK2L7R21H13 SK2L7G21H13
2-1/4 in.
(57 mm) 24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage SK2L35R21H13 SK2L35G21H13
Illuminated Transformer, Flashing SK2L■R21H13 SK2L■G21H13 Order SK2L■
Mushroom, Full Voltage [71][72]
For other voltages SK2L■R21H13 SK2L■G21H13
Screw-On
Plastic Head See Table [68] Resistor, Neon [69] SK2L■R21H13 SK2L■G21H13
LED [70] SK2L■R21H13 SK2L■G21H13
9001SK2L1R21

Table 19.151: Color Caps

Color Codes
Color SK1L/SK2L 1-3/8 in. (35 mm) 2-1/4 in. (57 mm)
Mushroom Mushroom

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Red R R20 R21
Green G G20 G21
Blue L L20 L21
Yellow Y Y20 Y21
White W W20 W21

INTERFACE
Clear C C20 C21
Amber A A20 A21
NOTE: To select and order Contact Blocks, Light Modules, Knobs, and Accessories, see Type KA Contact Blocks,
page 19-62 through Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64.
NOTE: For use in hazardous locations—See Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group, page 19-
64. Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.

19

[66] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[67] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage, see “H” Codes, page 19-65. Add the “H” number to the end of the operator type number.
[68] ■ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard and Shallow Depth Light Modules, page 19-63. EXAMPLE: SK2L_ with 240 Vac/Vdc = SK2L25.
[69] On neon light modules, use clear color caps only.
[70] Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below. EXAMPLE: SK2L25 with a blue 1-3/8 in. mushroom button = SK2L25L20.
[71] The cap must be the same color as the LED light module chosen, e.g., for green LED, use green color cap.
[72] The only difference between a no guard (SK2L) operator and mushroom button operator is the color cap.
19-57
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons 9001SK Corrosion Resistant Selector
Switches
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103 www.se.com/us

9001SK 2-Position Selector Switches

Table 19.152: 2-Position Selector Switches
1—Contact Closed
Contact Block Required 0—Contact Open

Quantity and Type Mount on Side

Contact Block Position
KA1 or KA2 or KA3 KA1 or KA2 or KA3
Left Right Left Right
KA3
KA3 #2 1 0 0 1
KA1
or or
KA1 #2 KA2
Side 2 #2 0 1 1 0
KA2
Side 1 KA3
KA3 #1 1 0 0 1

KA1
Operator Locating or or
KA1 #1 KA2
Notch #1 0 1 1 0
KA2
Top View
For Cam, see Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide, page 19-53 E D

Non-Illuminated Operators Type [73] Type [73]

Manual Return[74], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob SKS11 SKS12
With Knob [75] SKS11♦ SKS12♦
Operator with Contact Blocks and Standard black knob
With 1 KA1 on Side #2 SKS11BH13 —
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 SKS11BH1 —
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 SKS11BH2 —
Spring Return from Left [74], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob SKS25 —
With Knob [75] SKS25♦ —
Spring Return from Right [74], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob — SKS34
With Knob [75] — SKS34♦

Illuminated Operators Type [73] Type [73]

Manual Return [74], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK11J1 SK12J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK11J1R SK12J1R
With other Color Knob [75]and other Voltage Light Module [76] SK11J■♦ SK12J■♦
Spring Return from Left [74], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK25J1 —
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK25J1R —
With other Color Knob [75]and other Voltage Light Module [76]
19

SK25J■♦ —
Spring Return from Right [74], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer — SK34J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer — SK34J1R
With other Color Knob [75]and other Voltage Light Module [76] — SK34J■♦
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.153: Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No.
Standard Knob Gloved Hand Knob
Color
Knob Code Cat. No. [73] Knob Code Cat. No. [73]
70
INTERFACE

Black B B11 FB B25

Red R R8 FR R24
Green G G8 FG G24
Yellow Y Y8 FY Y24
Blue L L8 FL L24
2 Position White W W8 FW W24
Amber A A8 FA A24
Clear C C8 FC C24

Contact Blocks: Contact Blocks, page 19-62,Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64,
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64
Light Modules:Standard Light Modules, page 19-63
Knobs and Accessories:Additional Accessories for Type K and SK Operators, page

[73] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[74] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage, see “H” Codes, page 19-65. Add the chosen “H” number to the end of the operator.
[75] ♦ Add the knob color code chosen from Table 19.153 Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No., page 19-58. For LED, knob color must match LED.
[76] ■ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard Light Modules, page 19-63. Example: K25J with 208Vac = K25J3
19-58
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 9001SK Corrosion Resistant Selector 30 mm Push Buttons
Switches
www.se.com/us Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
9001SK 3-Position Selector Switches
Table 19.154: 3-Position Selector Switches
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open
Contact Quantity Mount
Block and on
Position Type Side
KA3 KA3
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
KA1 #2
or KA2 KA1 or
#2
Side 2 KA2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
Side 1 #2
KA3 KA3
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
Locating KA1 #1
Operator KA1
Notch or KA2 or
#1
KA2
Top View #1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

For Cam, see Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide,

page 19-53 B C D E F G J L M

Non-Illuminated Operators [77] Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return, Operator Only (without contact blocks)[78]
Without Knob SKS42 SKS43 SKS44 SKS45 SKS46 SKS47 SKS49 SKS401 SKS402
With Knob [79] SKS42♦ SKS43♦ SKS44♦ SKS45♦ SKS46♦ SKS47♦ SKS49♦ SKS401♦ SKS402♦
Operator with Contact Blocks and Standard black knob [80]
With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13) SKS42B- SKS43B- SKS44B- SKS45B- SKS47B- SKS49B- SKS401B- SKS402B-
H13 H13 H13 H13 SKS46BH13 H13 H13 H13 H13
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1) SKS42B- SKS43BH1 SKS44BH1 SKS45B- SKS46BH1 SKS47BH1 SKS49BH1 SKS401BH1 SKS402BH1
H1 H1
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2) SKS42B- SKS43BH2 SKS44BH2 SKS45B- SKS46BH2 SKS47BH2 SKS49BH2 SKS401BH2 SKS402BH2
H2 H2
Spring Return from Left to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [78]
Without Knob SKS62 SKS63 SKS64 SKS65 SKS66 SKS67 SKS69 SKS601 SKS602
With Knob [79] SKS62♦ SKS63♦ SKS64♦ SKS65♦ SKS66♦ SKS67♦ SKS69♦ SKS601♦ SKS602♦
Spring Return from Right to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [78]
Without Knob SKS72 SKS73 SKS74 SKS75 SKS76 SKS77 SKS79 SKS701 SKS702
With Knob [79] SKS72♦ SKS73♦ SKS74♦ SKS75♦ SKS76♦ SKS77♦ SKS79♦ SKS701♦ SKS702♦
Spring Return from Both Sides to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [78]
Without Knob SKS52 SKS53 SKS54 SKS55 SKS56 SKS57 SKS59 SKS501 SKS502
With Knob [79] SKS52♦ SKS53♦ SKS54♦ SKS55♦ SKS56♦ SKS57♦ SKS59♦ SKS501♦ SKS502♦

Illuminated Operators [77] Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [78]
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK42J1 SK43J1 SK44J1 SK45J1 SK46J1 SK47J1 SK49J1 SK401J1 SK402J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK42J1R SK43J1R SK44J1R SK45J1R SK46J1R SK47J1R SK49J1R SK401J1R SK402J1R
With other Color Knob [79] and other Voltage Light Module
[81] SK42J■♦ SK43J■♦ SK44J■♦ SK45J■♦ SK46J■♦ SK47J■♦ SK49J■♦ SK401J■♦ SK402J■♦
Spring Return from Left to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [78]

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK62J1 SK63J1 SK64J1 SK65J1 SK66J1 SK67J1 SK69J1 SK601J1 SK602J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK62J1R SK63J1R SK64J1R SK65J1R SK66J1R SK67J1R SK69J1R SK601J1R SK602J1R
With other Color Knob [79] and other Voltage Light Module
[81] SK62J■♦ SK63J■♦ SK64J■♦ SK65J■♦ SK66J■♦ SK67J■♦ SK69J■♦ SK601J■♦ SK602J■♦
Spring Return from Right to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [78]

INTERFACE
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK72J1 SK73J1 SK74J1 SK75J1 SK76J1 SK77J1 SK79J1 SK701J1 SK702J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK72J1R SK73J1R SK74J1R SK75J1R SK76J1R SK77J1R SK79J1R SK701J1R SK702J1R
With other Color Knob [79] and other Voltage Light Module
[81] SK72J■♦ SK73J■♦ SK74J■♦ SK75J■♦ SK76J■♦ SK77J■♦ SK79J■♦ SK701J■♦ SK702J■♦
Spring Return from Both Sides to Center, Operator Only (without contact blocks) [78]
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK52J1 SK53J1 SK54J1 SK55J1 SK56J1 SK57J1 SK59J1 SK501J1 SK502J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK52J1R SK53J1R SK54J1R SK55J1R SK56J1R SK57J1R SK59J1R SK501J1R SK502J1R
With other Color Knob [79] and other Voltage Light Module
[81] SK52J■♦ SK53J■♦ SK54J■♦ SK55J■♦ SK56J■♦ SK57J■♦ SK59J■♦ SK501J■♦ SK502J■♦

Table 19.155: Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No.
Standard Knob Gloved Hand Knob
Color
[82] Knob Code Cat. No. [77] [82] Knob Code Cat. No. [77]

19
Black B B11 FB B25
70 70 Red R R8 FR R24
Green G G8 FG G24
Yellow Y Y8 FY Y24
Blue L L8 FL L24
White W W8 FW W24
3 Position Amber A A8 FA A24
Clear C C8 FC C24

Contact Blocks: Contact Blocks, page 19-62,Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64,
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64
Light Modules:Standard Light Modules, page 19-63
Knobs and Accessories:Additional Accessories for Type K and SK Operators, page

[77] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[78] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. Add the "H code" from “H” Codes, page 19-65 as needed for your application.
[79] ♦ Add the knob color code chosen from the Selector Switch Assembly Code table. For LED, knob color must match LED.
[80] For other color knobs replace the B with knob color code. See Table 19.155 Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No., page 19-59 .
[81] ■ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard Light Modules, page 19-63. Example: K25J with 208Vac = K25J3
[82] Add the knob color code. For LED, knob color must match LED.
19-59
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons 9001SK Corrosion Resistant Selector
Switches
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103 www.se.com/us

9001SK 4-Position Selector Switches

Table 19.156: 4-Position Selector Switches
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open

Contact Block Position Quantity and Type Mount on Side

KA3 KA3
#2 1 0 0 0
KA1
KA1
or KA2 #2 or
Side 2 KA2
Side 1 #2 0 0 1 0

KA3 KA3
0 0 0 1
KA1 #1
Operator Locating KA1
Notch or KA2 #1 or
KA2
0 1 0 0
Top View #1
Cam (see Type K, KX, and SK Selector Switch Guide, page 19-53) H

Non-Illuminated Operators Type [83]

Manual Return [84], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob SKS88
With other Color Knob [85] SKS88♦

Illuminated Operators Type [83]

Manual Return [84], Operator Only (without contact blocks)
Without Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK88J1
With Standard Red Knob, 110-120V 50-60 Hz Transformer SK88J1R
With other Color Knob [85] and other Voltage Light Module [86] SK88J■♦

Table 19.157: Selector Switch Assembly Code and Knob Cat. No.
Standard Knob Gloved Hand Knob
Color
[87] Knob Code Cat. No. [83] [87] Knob Code Cat. No. [83]
46
Black B B11 FB B25
47 47 Red R R8 FR R24
Green G G8 FG G24
Yellow Y Y8 FY Y24
Blue L L8 FL L24
4 Position White W W8 FW W24
Amber A A8 FA A24
Clear C C8 FC C24

For Contact Blocks, see Contact Blocks, page 19-62,Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64,
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64
For Light Modules, see Standard Light Modules, page 19-63
For Knobs and Accessories, see Additional Accessories for Type K and SK Operators, page
19

Potentiometers with Dial Plate

Table 19.158: Potentiometers with Dial Plate (not UL listed)—Maximum Voltage 300
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Vac
Power Description Ratings Type
Operator Only, for Single Potentiometer SK20
Operator with Single Potentiometer SK21
2W NEMA 4, 13
Operator Only, for Tandem Potentiometer SK22
INTERFACE

Operator with Tandem Potentiometer SK23

When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

Table 19.159: Potentiometer Suffixes

Single Potentiometer
Suffix [88] Resistance Suffix [88] Resistance
01 50 Ω 07 5 kΩ
02 100 Ω 08 10 kΩ
04 500 Ω 09 25 kΩ
05 1 kΩ 13 500 kΩ
39 2 kΩ 37 750 kΩ
06 2.5 kΩ 14 1 MΩ
Tandem Potentiometer
Resistance
Suffix [88]
Front Rear
82 1 kΩ 1 kΩ
NOTE: Any potentiometer with a shaft 7/8 in. long and 1/4 in. diameter may be used
with these operators.

[83] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[84] These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. Add the "H code" from “H” Codes, page 19-65 as needed for your application.
[85] ♦ Add the knob color code chosen from the Selector Switch Assembly Code table. For LED, knob color must match LED.
[86] ■ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard Light Modules, page 19-63. Example: K25J with 208Vac = K25J3
[87] Add the knob color code from Table 19.237. For LED, knob color must match LED
[88] For the complete part number, add the suffix from this table to the catalog number from Table 19.158 Potentiometers with Dial Plate, page 19-60. Example: 9001K2105.

19-60
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type SK Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Type SK Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights

Table 19.160: Pilot Lights—UL Types 4, 4X, [89]
With Red With Green With Other Without
Description Voltage Style Fresnel Color Fresnel Color Color Cap Color Cap
Cap [90] Cap [90] [90] [91] [90]
110–120 V, 50–60 Transformer SKP1R31 SKP1G31 SKP1■ SKP1
Hz
Standard 220–240 V, 50–60
Pilot Light Transformer SKP7R31 SKP7G31 SKP7■ SKP7
Hz
9001SKP1 (Fresnel color 24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage SKP35R31 SKP35G31 SKP35■ SKP35
cap shown)
For other voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED [92] SKP▲R31 SKP▲G31 SKP■ SKP▲
[90] Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor [93] SKP▲R31 SKP▲G31 SKP▲■ SKP▲
110–120 V, 50–60 Transformer SKT1R31 SKT1G31 SKT1■ SKT1
Hz
Push-To-Test 220–240 V, 50–60
Pilot Light Transformer SKT7R31 SKT7G31 SKT7■ SKT7
Hz
9001SKT1 (Fresnel color 24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage SKT35R31 SKT35G31 SKT35■ SKT35
cap shown)
For other voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED [92] SKT▲R31 SKT▲G31 SKT▲■ SKT▲
[90] Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor [93] SKT▲R31 SKT▲G31 SKT▲■ SKT▲
120 Vac Only Resistor SKTR38R31 SKTR38G31 SKTR38■ SKTR38
Remote Test
Pilot Light 24–28 Vac Only Full Voltage SKTR35R31 SKTR35G31 SKTR35■ SKTR35
9001SKTR38 (Fresnel color For other voltages Full Voltage or Resistor [95]
cap shown) [90] [91] [94] SKTR▲R31 SKTR▲G31 SKTR▲■ SKTR▲

Table 19.161: Color Caps

Color Plastic Fresnel [96] Plastic Domed [96]
Amber A31 A9
Blue L31 L9
Clear C31 C9
Plastic Fresnel Plastic Domed Green G31 G9
Red R31 R9
White W31 W9
Yellow Y31 Y9

Typical Wiring Diagram

L1 L2 L1 TEST BUTTON L2
START M (TEST) C L2
O.L.
1 STOP 2 3
M L1 M1
STOP START
(SIG)

M L2
(TEST) C L2

R LSI
L1 M2
(SIG)

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

C

Test (TEST) C L2
L1
M3 L1 CR
(SIG)
Push-To-Test Pilot Light

INTERFACE
Remote Test Pilot Light

NOTE: To select and order Contact Blocks, Light Modules, Knobs, and Accessories, see Type KA Contact Blocks,
page 19-62 through Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks, page 19-64.
NOTE: For use in hazardous locations—See Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group, page 19-
64. Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.

19

[89] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[90] ▲ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Standard and Shallow Depth Light Modules, page 19-63.EXAMPLE: SKT•••R31 with 208 Vac red LED voltage = SKT37LRR31.
[91] ■ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below.EXAMPLE: SKP1 with a blue fresnel cap = SKP1L31.
[92] The cap must be the same color as the LED light module chosen, e.g., for a green LED, use a green color cap.
[93] On neon light modules, use clear color caps only.
[94] Use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes on remote test pilot lights. Do not choose LED, neon or transformer codes. For AC use only.
[95] Use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes on remote test pilot lights. Do not choose LED (exception — these LED codes are allowed: 38LG, 38LL, 38LR, 38LW, 38LY), neon or
transformer codes. For AC use only.
[96] Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below.EXAMPLE: SKP1 with a blue fresnel cap = SKP1L31.
19-61
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons Type K, SK and KX Electrical Components
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Type KA Contact Blocks

The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks are Fingersafe® contact blocks (meeting VDE
Table 19.162: Standard Contact Blocks 0106 Part 100). They have one screw mounting and captive (backed out) plus/minus
Description Symbol Type terminal screws. These contact blocks are double-break, direct-acting contacts. Because
of the wiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable
controllers. All contact blocks listed below accept up to 2 #12–#24 AWG solid or
stranded wires. Recommended tightening torque for screw terminals is 7 lb-in.
Direct-Acting KA1
Contact Blocks with Gold Flashed Contacts
Binder Head Screws with Standard
(Clear Cover) Symbol (not Fingersafe) Pressure Wire Terminals
Type [98] Quantity [99] Type [98]

KA21 25–Up KA31

KA2
KA22 25–Up KA32
(Green Cover)
KA23 25–Up KA33

KA24 25–Up KA34

Direct-Acting KA3 N.O. Early Closing

KA25 25–Up KA35

N.C. Contact Late Opening
(Red Cover)
Contact blocks listed below are not Fingersafe, but provide:

N.O. Contact Early

KA4 • Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork
tongue connectors
Closing
(Clear Cover)
• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75"
deep vs. 0.97" deep on the Fingersafe)
• Same as old style Series G product
available prior to March, 1989.
N.C. Contact Late
Opening
KA5 • For assembled operators, use form Y238
(add to catalog number as suffix, for
(Red Cover)
example: 9001KRU1H13Y238)

KA6 Table 19.164: Contact blocks (not Fingersafe)

N.O. Contact Early
Closing Symbol Type [98] Symbol Type [98]
(Green Cover)
19

KA1G KA4G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
Table 19.163: Additional Circuit Arrangements
KA2G N.C. Contact Late Opening KA5G
Description Symbol Type
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Sequencing [97]
N.O. Contact of Order One Type KA3G KA6G
KA4 closes before KA4 and One
Type KA1 N.O. Contact Early Closing
N.O. Contact on KA4 KA1
KA1
Overlapping [97] Table 19.165: Contact blocks with Quick-Connect terminals (not Fingersafe)
N.O. Contact of Order One
INTERFACE

KA4 closes before Type KA4 and Symbol Type [98]

N.C. Contact of KA5 One Type KA5
KA4
KA5 Opens KA12

KA13

Table 19.166: Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts—Types KA1–KA6, KA21–KA25, KA31–KA35, KA1G–KA6G
AC DC
Resistive 75% Inductive and Resistive
Inductive (NEMA / UL Type A600) 35% Power Factor Power Factor (NEMA Q600)
Volts Make Break Make, Break Volts Make and Break
Continuous and Continuous
Carrying Continuous KA2 KA5 Carrying
Amperes VA Amperes VA Amperes KA1 KA4 Capacity
Amperes KA3 KA6
120 60 6.0 125 0.55 0.55 — —
240 30 3.0 250 0.27 0.27 — — 2.5
7200 720 10 10
480 15 1.5 600 0.10 0.10 — —
600 12 1.2

[97] For push buttons or two-position selector switches only. For sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators, refer to catalog 9001CT0001.
[98] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.
[99] Minimum order quanitity is 25.

19-62
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type K, SK and KX Electrical Components 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Standard and Shallow Depth Light Modules

Table 19.167: Standard Light Modules for Types K, SK, and KX Control Units[100][101][102][103]
Light Module Voltage Temperature Replacement Lamp
Voltage Description Assembly Rating Code
Type [104] Code T-Code Part Number [100]
Full Voltage
All (without Bayonet Base Lamp) KM40 40 — — None
6 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage KM31 31 .9 VA T5 2550101020
6 Vac/Vdc LED Red KM31LR 31LR T6 6508805201
6 Vac/Vdc LED Green KM31LG 31LG T6 6508805203
6 Vac/Vdc LED Yellow KM31LY 31LY T6 6508805202
12–14 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage KM32 32 1.2 VA T5 2550101037
12–14 Vac/Vdc LED Red KM32LR 32LR T6 6508805201
12–14 Vac/Vdc LED Green KM32LG 32LG T6 6508805203
12–14 Vac/Vdc LED Yellow KM32LY 32LY T6 6508805202
18 Vac/Vdc Resistor KM33 33 1.4 VA T5 2550101037
24–28 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage KM35 35 1.2 VA T3C 2550101002
24–28 Vac/Vdc LED Red KM35LR 35LR .28 VA T4 6508805210
24–28 Vac/Vdc LED Green KM35LG 35LG .28 VA T4 6508805212
24–28 Vac/Vdc LED Yellow KM35LY 35LY .28 VA T4 6508805211
24–28 Vac/Vdc LED White KM35LW 35LW .28 VA T4 6508805214
24–28 Vac/Vdc LED Blue KM35LL 35LL .28 VA T4 6508805213
48 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage KM36 36 2.6 VA T3A 2550101025
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz LED Red KM1LR 1LR T6 6508805201
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz LED Green KM1LG 1LG T6 6508805203
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz LED Yellow KM1LY 1LY T6 6508805202
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KM1 1 2.4 VA T6 2550101020
110–120 V, 50–60 Hz Flashing KMF1 F1 .85 VA T6 2550101036
120 Vac/Vdc Full Voltage/Resistor KM38 38 3.0 VA T4 2550101027
120 Vac/Vdc Neon [105] KM11 11 0.2 VA T6 2550101013
120 Vac/Vdc LED Red KM38LR 38LR 1.4 VA T4A 6508805210
120 Vac/Vdc LED Green KM38LG 38LG 1.4 VA T4A 6508805212
120 Vac/Vdc LED Yellow KM38LY 38LY 1.4 VA T4A 6508805211
120 Vac/Vdc LED White KM38LW 38LW 1.4 VA T4A 6508805214
120 Vac/Vdc LED Blue KM38LL 38LL 1.4 VA T4A 6508805213
208–220 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KM3 3 2.5 VA T6 2550101020
208–220 V, 50–60 Hz LED Red KM3LR 3LR T6 6508805201
208–220 V, 50–60 Hz LED Green KM3LG 3LG T6 6508805203
208–220 V, 50–60 Hz LED Yellow KM3LY 3LY T6 6508805202
208–220 V, 50–60 Hz LED White KM3LW 3LW T6 6508805215
208–220 V, 50–60 Hz LED Blue KM3LL 3LL T6 6508805216
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KM7 7 2.0 VA T6 2550101020
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz LED Red KM7LR 7LR T6 6508805201
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz LED Green KM7LG 7LG T6 6508805203
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz LED Yellow KM7LY 7LY T6 6508805202
220–240 V, 50–60 Hz LED White KM7LW 7LW T6 6508805215

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

220–240 V, 50–60 Hz LED Blue KM7LL 7LL T6 6508805216
240 Vac/Vdc Resistor KM25 25 6.0 VA T3A 2550101027
240 Vac/Vdc Neon [105] KM12 12 0.3 VA T6 2550101013
277 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KM8 8 2.4 VA T6 2550101020
380–480 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KM5 5 2.8 VA T6 2550101020

INTERFACE
480 Vac/Vdc Neon [105] KM14 14 0.5 VA T6 2550101013
550–600 V, 50–60 Hz Transformer KM6 6 2.5 VA T6 2550101020
NOTE: Light modules are available in other voltages. For additional information, refer to Catalog 9001CT0001.
The products in Table 19.167 have been assigned Temperature Classifications (T-Codes) in accordance with UL 121201 (2017) — Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and
II, Division 2 and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. These codes can aid the user in proper application of these products in accordance with ISO/ISA/IEC
60079–0 (2017–12) Explosive Atmospheres — Part 0: Equipment — General Requirements and the National Electric Code NFPA 70 — Article 500.

NOTE: Light modules shown in Table 19.168 are not UL Certified for use in hazardous locations.

Table 19.168: Shallow Depth Light Modules For Types K and SK Control Units [100] [102] [106] [101]
Light Module Voltage Assembly Temperature Replacement Lamp
Voltage Description Rating
Type [104] Code Code T-Code Part Number

19
Full Voltage KM55 55 1.2 VA — 2550101002
LED Red KM55LR 55LR — 6508805204
24–28 Vac/Vdc
LED Green KM55LG 55LG 0.5 VA — 6508805206
LED Yellow KM55LY 55LY — 6508805205
Full Voltage KM58 58 3.0 VA — 2550101027
LED Red KM58LR 58LR — 6508805204
110–120 Vac/Vdc
LED Green KM58LG 58LG 0.5 VA — 6508805206
LED Yellow KM58LY 58LY — 6508805205

File: E78403 File: LR25490 marked

CCN: NKCR Class: 3211 03

[100] For use with all operators except KX and remote test pilot.
[101] For use in hazardous locations—See Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group, page 19-64.
[102] With LED light modules, use either a clear color cap or a cap the same color as the LED.
[103] With neon type light modules, use a clear color cap only.
[104] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.
[105] Not for use on KX operators.
[106] Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%.
19-63
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Push Buttons Type K, SK and KX Electrical Components
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103
www.se.com/us

Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group

Table 19.170: Square D Offering According to Class, Division, and Group
Hazardous locations do not always require the use For
of explosion-proof equipment like the Class 9001 Use
Class Division Group(s)
Type BR control stations. Selecting the most I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System
appropriate device for the location can save you 1. 9001 BR station
money. For more information on the types of I 1 B, C, D
2. Intrinsically Safe System
hazardous locations, contact your local electrical 1. 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with restrictions [107] [108]
inspector. I 2 A
2. Intrinsically Safe System
1. 9001 BR station
I 2 B, C, D 2. 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with restrictions [107] [108]
Table 19.169: Hazardous Locations
3. Intrinsically Safe System
Types File: E10054
(N) File: LR26817 1. 9001 BR station
K, SK Class: 3218 02 II 1 E, F, G
CCN: NOIV 2. Intrinsically Safe System
1. 9001 BR station
II 2 E, F 2. 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with restrictions [107] [108]
3. Intrinsically Safe System
1. 9001 BR station
II 2 G 2. 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with restrictions [109] [108]
3. Intrinsically Safe System
1. 9001 BR Station
III 1, 2 — 2. 9001 K, SK, KX control stations with restrictions [109] [108]
3. Intrinsically Safe System

Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks

Table 19.171: Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks [110] [111]
Suitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description Symbol Type [112]

KA41
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator is
as indicated on individual selection tables for standard contact blocks, except:
KA42
• On 3 position selector switches with cams C, D, E, F, G, L, or M, mount reed
blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
KA43
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (either
side), maximum 2 in tandem.
KA44
• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks
on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
KA45

Maximum Load
Max. Vac/Vdc
Resistive Inductive Continuous
19

32/30 .25 A .10 A .5 A

120/100 8 VA 3 VA .5 A

Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.172: Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks [110] [111] [113]
Description Symbol Type [112]

KA51
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator is
as indicated on individual selection tables for standard contact blocks, except:
INTERFACE

KA52
• On 3 position selector switches with cams C, D, E, F, G, L, or M, mount reed
blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
KA53
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (either
side), maximum 2 in tandem.
KA54
• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks
on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
KA55

Make Break
Volts Continuous
A VA A VA
AC NEMA C300 [114]
120 10.00 1.000
1200 120 3.0
240 5.00 .500
DC NEMA Q150 [115]
115 .50 58 .50 58 3.0

[107] Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations, if:
1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.
2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2 areas. (Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push-To-Test pilot lights.)
3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules other than the transformer type. (Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push-To-Test pilot lights.)
4. The operators are mounted in any NEMA 4 & 13 enclosures.
[108] UL Listed: File E10054(N), CCN NOIV.
[109] Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
[110] Not for use in pendant stations.
[111] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.
[112] All contact blocks listed below accept #12–18 solid or stranded wire.
[113] The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 V and the minimum current is 1 mA.
[114] Inductive Rating—35% Power Factor.
[115] Inductive and Resistive Ratings
19-64
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type K, SK and KX Contact Block “H” 30 mm Push Buttons
Numbers
www.se.com/us Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1103

Type K, SK, and KX Contact Block “H” Numbers

The design of Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allows them to be mounted side by
side and/or in tandem. This enables you to specify an operator and a specific
arrangement of contact blocks (shipped fully assembled) with a single Type number.
Mounting Hole for All Types K, SK, and KX Control Units
Table 19.173: “H” Codes
Suffix No. Positions .19
5 .09 .25 Dia.
(Add to Operator
Type) 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 6
Example: A Type KR1B H1 KA1 .69 .56
push button with 2 Type H2 KA1 KA1 18 14 *Units also mount in 1.20 dia.
KA1 contact blocks would H3 KA1 KA1 KA1 30
be Class 9001 H4 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1
Type KR1BH2. H5 KA2 Dual Dimensions: INCHES
A30464-162 Millimeters
H6 KA3
H7 KA2 KA2
H8 KA3 KA3 *1.22 Dia. *1.22 Dia.
Alternate
Preferred 31 31
H9 KA4 KA1 Cover Drilling Cover Drilling
H10 KA4 KA5
H11 KA1 KA1 KA1 Hole Punch: Use Greenlee Tool #60242 to punch mounting hole and notch.
H12 KA2 KA3 KA2 KA3
Maximum Contact Block Usage(Includes Types K, SK and KX)
POS 1 POS 3 POS 5
POS 2 POS 4 POS 6

H13 KA1
H14
H15 KA2
KA3
KA3 KA2
• 2 blocks mounted side by side only: Any 2, 3 or 4 position spring return selector
switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed).
H16 KA2 KA3 KA2 KA3
H17 KA1 KA1 KA2 • 2 blocks mounted in tandem 1 side only: Any 2 operator interlocked push button.
H18
H19
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA3 KA3
• 2 blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks): Any selector push button,
keyed push button, 2, 3, or 4 position maintained selector switch (non-illuminated,
H21 KA2 KA3 KA1 KA1 KA1 illuminated or keyed), push-pull operators (non-illuminated or illuminated), joy stick,
Side 1 Side 2 dual push button.
H23 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1 KA1
Locating Nib
H24
H25
KA1 KA2
KA5 KA3
• 3 blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks): Single momentary push buttons
(non-illuminated or illuminated).
NOTE: For “H” Codes not in this table, contact your local Schneider Electric Customer Care Center.

Table 19.174: Dimensions When Using Contact Blocks

.06 min. .25 max. C D D E F
Panel 2 6
Thickness 2.10
Panel Thickness B
1/16 min.-1/4 max. 53 Light KA KA KA KA

Module Unit Unit Unit Unit

A
1.60 KA KA KA KA Light Light
41
Unit Unit Unit Unit
Module Module

0.56 1.66 .97 1.31

14 42 25
2.63 0.56 3.66
67 14 93 Enclosure or D 1.13
Standard Blocks Reed Blocks Grounded Metal Part D30052-287

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.175: Basic Operators (Without Color Caps, Mushroom Table 19.176: Min. Centerline Spacing, Type K & SK Control
Buttons, Knobs, Selector Switch Cams, Contact Blocks, Light Units
Modules, or Legend Plates) Legend Centerline Spacing (in.)
Operator
Plate A B C D E F
For UL Types/NEMA
Legend Plate Orientation Position #1

INTERFACE
Description 1, 3R, 4,
4, 4X, 13 [116] Standard Push Button 1.75 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.69 0.88
12, 13 [116]
KN2 1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 1.75 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.69 0.88
Non-Illuminated Push Button (Extended Guard) KR2 SKR2 KN5 2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Non-Illuminated Push Button (No Guard) KR3 SKR3 Selector Switch Knobs 1.75 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.69 0.88
Non-Illuminated Push Button (Mushroom Button/ Standard Push Button 2.00 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.75 0.88
Screw-On) KR20 SKR20 1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.00 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.75 0.88
KN3
Non-Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary) KR6 — 2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Selector Switch Knobs 2.00 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.75 0.88
Non-Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary Standard Push Button 1.94 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.62 0.88
Interlocked) KR67 —
1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 1.94 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.62 0.88
Non-Illuminated Dual Push Button (Maintained KN4
KR7 — 2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Interlocked) Selector Switch Knobs 1.74 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.62 0.88
Momentary Pull—Maintained Neutral— Standard Push Button 2.38 1.62 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Momentary Push KR8 [117] [118] SKR8 [117]
1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.38 1.62 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
KN6
Maintained Pull—Maintained Push KR9 [117] [118] SKR9 [117] 2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.38 1.62 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12

19
Selector Switch Knobs 2.38 1.62 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard—Plastic Top) K1L [119] SK1L [119]
Legend Plate Orientation Position #2
Illuminated Push Button and Push-To-Test (No
Guard) K2L [119] [120] SK2L [119] [120] Standard Push Button 1.62 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.75 0.88
KN2 1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 1.62 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.75 0.88
Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard—Metal Top) K3L [119] — KN5 2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Standard Pilot Light KP SKP Selector Switch Knobs 1.62 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.75 0.88
3 Position Maintained Selector Switch KS4 [117] SKS4 [117] Standard Push Button 1.75 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.00 0.88
1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 1.75 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.00 0.88
3 Position Spring Return Both Sides To Center— KS5 [117] SKS5 [117] KN3
Selector Switch 2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Selector Switch Knobs 1.75 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.00 0.88
3 Position Spring Return Left To Center—Selector KS6 [117] SKS6 [117]
Switch Standard Push Button 1.62 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.94 1.00
1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 1.62 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.94 1.00
3 Position Spring Return Right To Center— KS7 [117] SKS7 [117] KN4
Selector Switch 2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.44 2.25 2.25 1.12
Selector Switch Knobs 1.62 1.31 1.44 2.25 1.94 1.00
Standard Push Button 2.25 1.31 1.62 2.38 2.38 0.88
1.375 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.62 2.38 2.38 0.88
KN6
2.25 in. Dia. Mushroom 2.25 1.31 1.62 2.38 2.38 1.12
Selector Switch Knobs 2.25 1.31 1.62 2.38 2.38 0.88

[116] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[117] Operator can be converted to an illuminated operator by removing the liner (6512240601) and adding a light module.
[118] These operators can be supplied with 1-3/8 in or 2-1/4 in dia. mushroom buttons. For 1-3/8 in.: add ( ) 20 to type number. For 2-1/4 in.: Add ( ) 21 to type number. The ( ) refers to the color
chosen—see Additional Accessories for Type K and SK Operators, page . Voids UL and NEMA 6 Rating.
[119] Operator can be converted to a non-illuminated operator by adding liner (6512240601).
[120] Operator includes jumper wires for push-to-test conversion.
19-65
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 16 mm Push Buttons XB6 Complete Devices
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130406EN
www.se.com/us

XB6 Complete Devices

Table 19.177: Illuminated Push Buttons (12–24 Vac/Vdc LED included)
Complete Units with Quick Connectors/Solder Tabs

Type of Type of Contact

Operator Color
Rectangular Square Round
N.O. N.C. Catalog Number
White XB6DW1B1B XB6CW1B1B XB6AW1B1B
1 —
XB6DW•••B XB6CE•••B Green XB6DW3B1B XB6CW3B1B XB6AW3B1B
— 1 Red XB6DW4B2B XB6CW4B2B XB6AW4B2B
Flush, White XB6DW1B5B XB6CW1B5B XB6AW1B5B
spring return Green XB6DW3B5B XB6CW3B5B XB6AW3B5B
1 1 Red XB6DW4B5B — XB6AW4B5B
Yellow XB6DW5B5B XB6CW5B5B —
Blue XB6DW6B5B — XB6AW6B5B
Green XB6DF3B1B XB6CF3B1B XB6AF3B1B
XB6AF•••B Yellow XB6DF5B1B — —
White XB6DF1B5B XB6CF1B5B XB6AF1B5B
1 1 Green XB6DF3B5B XB6CF3B5B XB6AF3B5B
Red XB6DF4B5B — —
White — XB6CE1B1B —
Extended, 1 —
spring return Green — — XB6AE3B1B
Green — — XB6AE3B5B

For Legends, see XB6 Legend Plates and Legends , page

19
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

19-66
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XB6 Complete Devices 16 mm Push Buttons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130406EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.178: Pilot Lights (120 Vac LED)

Complete Units with Quick Connectors/Solder Tabs

Color
XB6AV••B Rectangular Square Round
Catalog Number
Green — — XB6AV3GB
Red — — XB6AV4GB
Yellow — — XB6AV5GB

Table 19.179: Push Buttons (Non-Illuminated)

Complete Units with Quick Connectors/Solder Tabs

Type of Contact
Type of Push Color
Rectangular Square Round
N.O. N.C. Catalog Number
White XB6DA11B XB6CA11B —
XB6DA••B XB6CA••B Black — XB6CA21B XB6AA21B
1 —
Green XB6DA31B — XB6AA31B
Flush, spring Blue XB6DA61B — —
return — 1 Black XB6DA22B — —
Black — XB6CA25B XB6AA25B
Green XB6DA35B — XB6AA35B
Red XB6DA45B XB6CA45B —

XB6AA••B Table 19.180: Trigger Action Emergency Stop Mushroom Head Push Buttons
(Color Red) [1]
Shape of Type of Contact Diameter
Type of Push of Head (mm) Catalog Number
Head N.O. N.C.
— 1 30 XB6AS8342B
Turn-to-release
1 1 30 XB6AS8345B
— 1 30 —
Key release
1 1 30 —
XB6AS8345B XB6AS9345B
For Legends, see XB6 Legend Plates and Legends , page

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

[1] Complies with ISO 13850 standards for Emergency Stop push buttons when used with circular Legend Plate ZB6Y7330 (see Circular Legends, 45 mm, page )
19-67
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Rotary Cam Switches K2 Custom and K30–K150 Power Switching
Refer to Catalog 9003CT1301
www.se.com/us

Class 9003
Type K Rotary Cam Switches
Used in building control panels and consoles, Type K cam switches allow control of processes and utilities in industry and buildings,
Applications and direct control for simple machines.

Off-On/On-Off switches 1 to 6-pole 1 to 6-pole

Stepping switches 2 to 12-position, 1 to 4-pole —
Changeover switches 1 to 5-pole 1 to 4-pole
Functions Measurement switches Voltmeter and ammeter —
Reversing switches 2 and 3-pole 2 and 3-pole
Reversing star-delta
Star-delta Star-delta
switches
Pole change switches 2 and 3-speed 2-speed
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) 20 A 32 A 50 A 63 A 115 A 150 A
690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V
AC-3 - 3-phase AC-3 - 3-phase AC-3 - 3-phase AC-3 - 3-phase AC-3 - 3-phase AC-3 - 3-phase
Electrical operating characteristics 230 V - 2.2 kW - 8.3 A 230 V - 5.5 kW 230 V - 7.5 kW 230 V - kW 230 V - 5 kW 230 V - 22 kW
AC - 15 AC - 15 AC - 15 – – –
230 V - 4 A 230 V - 14 A 230 V - 6 A
IP 40
Front plate degree of protection IP 40
IP 65 (with seal)
Complete switches and custom
Product Composition Complete switches
Adaptable sub-assemblies
Compatibility Ø 22 control and signalling units –
Multi-fixing
Front Mounting By 4 holes on 48 mm centers By 4 holes on 68 mm centers
Mounting Single Ø 22 hole
Rear Mounting Screw fixing, 4 holes on 36 mm centers Screw fixing, 4 holes on 48 mm centers Screw fixing, 4 holes on 68 mm
centers
45 x 45
Front plate dimensions (mm) 64 x 64 88 x 88
60 x 60 (adaptable sub-assemblies)
Black and red standard and long handles
Key operator
Operating heads Black standard handle
Metallic head Metallic legend, black marking
Metallic legend with black marking or
black legend with white marking
UL-CSA
19

Approvals cULus
EN/IEC 60947-3
EN/IEC 60947-3
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
Type Type K2 Type K30–K150
Cam switch model [1] Class 9003, K2 K30 K50 K63 K115 K150
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

[1] Incomplete part numbers. Contact your local supplier for assistance.
19-68
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Application and Ordering Information Rotary Cam Switches
Class 9003
www.se.com/us

Instructions for 9003K2 Key Sheet

The Key Sheet for ordering a 9003K2 cam switch is on page 19-70, and an example of a completed key sheet is on page 19-71. The instructions
below are for filling out the key sheet on page 19-70.
1. Select the box for K2 (20 A).
2. Identify the Product quantity in the box provided.
3. Verify front mounting by selecting the box: Front Mounting.
4. If ordering a base/contact block only, select 22 mm plastic or 22 mm metal mounting. Then complete the following:
a. ③ Switching Angle (positions)
b. ④ Contact scheme and jumpers (pre-wired)
5. If ordering a complete switch (base/contact block, head, legend), check the box. Then complete the following:
a. ① Operating head preference
b. ② Legend preference
c. ③ Switching angle (positions)
d. ④ Contact scheme and jumpers (pre-wired)
6. Operating head preference ① (identify the operating head preferred)
7. Legend preference ② (identify the legend preference)
8. Switching angle (positions) ③ and special legend marking
a. Identify whether the switch need is 30° or 60°, or 45° or 90° switching angle.
b. Fill in the legend markings desired at the positions indicated. Zero degrees is always straight up.
9. The rotation of the operator stops clockwise at the top or 0° position. If full rotation through 360° is desired, the Full rotation through 360° box
must be checked.
10. Contact scheme and jumpers (pre-wired) ④
a. If jumpers are desired to be pre-wired, draw a horizontal line between the terminals to be jumpered per the example on page 19-71.
b. Refer to the Legend at the bottom of page 19-70 for contact sequences, i.e.: X indicates contact closure. See page 19-71 for examples of
filling in this portion of the key sheet.

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

19-69
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Rotary Cam Switches Application and Ordering Information
Class 9003
www.se.com/us

9003K2 Cam Switch Order Form

Order No. 9003K2 (20 A):
Date :
Agency: Product Front mounting
Branch: quantity:
Customer: Base/contact block only (no operating head):
Address: 22 plastic: 22 metal:
Complete: 3 4

Delivery instructions: Complete switch (base/contact block, head, legend)

Complete: 1 2 3 4

Product reference: For 22 mm plastic mounting:

Type : K............... 1 Operating head reference: 9003K
3 Switching angle (positions) 2 Legend reference: 9003KZ . . . . . .
or or or for mounting with metal base:
0 1 1 Operating head reference: KAX Z . . . . . . . . . .
2
3 2 Legend reference: XBC Y . . . . .
Special legend marking:
positions As per diagram on left: As per form:
FAX

Accessories / comments: ...............

Full rotation through 360˚: ....................................
4 Contact scheme and jumpers (pre-wired):

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
19

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

0
1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
2
3
x 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
INTERFACE

Key withdrawal position for key operators; by default, withdrawal in all positions.
Conditions for provision of spring return function:
Spring return to 30˚ from 0˚ position or to last position after a 90˚ angle (for maximum of 3 contacts simultaneously)
Contact closed in Contact closed with Contact closed Contact closed Overlap of two Contact
X

X X

X X

1 position. break between the and maintained and maintained contacts between overlapping
X

2 positions between several between two two positions on previous

(for angle 45˚) successive positions and next
X

positions positions

Check the box to confirm selection .......... Fill in with text

19-70
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Application and Ordering Information Rotary Cam Switches
Class 9003
www.se.com/us

9003K2 Cam Switch Order Form—Example

Order No. 9003K2 (20 A): X
Date :
Agency: Product Front mounting X
quantity: 1
Branch:
Customer: Base/contact block only (no operating head):
Address: 22 plastic: 22 metal:
Complete: 3 4

Delivery instructions: Complete switch (base/contact block, head, legend)

X
Complete: 1 2 3 4

Product reference: For 22 mm plastic mounting:

Type : K............... 1 Operating head reference: 9003K AC1B
3 Switching angle (positions) 2 Legend reference: 9003KZ18
or or or for mounting with metal base:
0 0 1 1 Operating head reference: KAX Z . . . . . . . . . .
2
A 1 3 2 Legend reference: XBC Y . . . . .
2
Special legend marking:
positions As per diagram on left: As per form:
FAX

Accessories / comments: KZ
. . . .36
...........
Full rotation through 360˚: ....................................
4 Contact scheme and jumpers (pre-wired):

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40

INTERFACE
0
1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
2
3
x 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
A
X X

0
X

1
X X

2
X

19

Key withdrawal position for key operators; by default, withdrawal in all positions.
Conditions for provision of spring return function:
Spring return to 30˚ from 0˚ position or to last position after a 90˚ angle (for maximum of 3 contacts simultaneously)
Contact closed in Contact closed with Contact closed Contact closed Overlap of two Contact
X

X X

X X

1 position. break between the and maintained and maintained contacts between overlapping
X

2 positions between several between two two positions on previous

(for angle 45˚) successive positions and next
X

positions positions

Check the box to confirm selection .......... Fill in with text

19-71
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Control Stations and Enclosures XAL 22 mm Control Stations
Refer to Catalog 9001CT1104
www.se.com/us

XAL Control Stations, Enclosures, and Accessories

Table 19.181: Start or Stop Function Polycarbonate; Light gray base, RAL7035;
Dark gray lid, RAL7016
Type of Contact
Description Type of Push Marking Catalog Number
N.O. N.C.
Marking on Legend Holder
Flush black 1 — Start XALD101H29H7
1 momentary push button
Flush red — 1 Stop XALD111H29H7
Marking on Legend Holder
1 mushroom head push
button Ø 40 mm, Red — 1 Stop on red legend XALD164H29H7
XALD101H29H7 momentary

Table 19.182: Trigger Action Emergency Stop

Polycarbonate; Light gray base, RAL7035; Yellow lid, RAL1012
Type of Contact
Description Type Catalog Number
N.O. N.C.
1 mushroom head push button Ø 40
mm, red Trigger action [1] — 1 XALK178H7
Turn-to-release
1 mushroom head push button Ø 40
mm, red Trigger action [1] — 1 XALK188H7
Key release (Key No. 455)
XALK174H7 1 mushroom head push button Ø 40
mm, red Trigger action [2] — 1 XALK198H7
Push-pull

Table 19.183: Start-Stop Function Polycarbonate; Light gray base, RAL7035; Dark
gray lid, RAL7016
Type of Contact Catalog
Description Type of Push Text
N.O. N.C. Number
1 flush black 1 — Start
1 flush red Stop XALD211H29H7
2 momentary — 1
push buttons 1 flush black 1 — Forward
1 flush black Reverse XALD251H29H7
1 —

Table 19.184: Three Function Polycarbonate; Light gray base, RAL7035; Dark gray
lid, RAL7016
Type of Contact Catalog
Description Type of Push Text
N.O. N.C. Number
1 — Open
— 1 Stop XALD351H29H7
19

1 — Close
3 momentary 1 flush black 1 — Forward
XALD211H29H7 XALD321H29H7 push buttons 1 flush red — 1 Stop XALD311H29H7
(no markings) 1 flush black 1 — Reverse
1 — Up
— 1 Stop XALD321H29H7
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

1 — Down

Table 19.185: Empty Enclosures [3]

Description Number of Holes Catalog Number
INTERFACE

For normal environments, CSA approved and UL Listed (with stainless steel lid mounting screws)
1 XALD01H7
Light gray base RAL7035 2 XALD02H7
Dark gray lid RAL7016 3 XALD03H7
4 XALD04H7
5 XALD05H7
Light gray base RAL7035
1 XALK01H7
Yellow lid RAL1012

[1] Emergency Stop (EN / IEC 13850)

[2] Emergency Off (IEC 60364-5-53)
[3] For customer assembly using XB5 operators and standard screw-terminal contact blocks, see XB5 Non-Illuminated Operators, page 19-28.
Either mounting method can be used: contact block ZENL mounting on metal plate, or contact block ZBE mounting on operator with mounting collar.
19-72
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XAP 22 mm Enclosures and Accessories Control Stations and Enclosures
Refer to Catalog 9001CT1104
www.se.com/us

XAP Enclosures and Accessories

Table 19.186: Undrilled Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced Polyester
Type H x W Dimensions Catalog
IN mm Number
3.34 x 5.75 85 x 146 XAPA1100
NEMA 4, 4X, 13 Without hinges
Usable depth 3.27 in. (83 mm) 3.34 x 8.90 85 x 226 XAPA2100
5.95 x 9.49 151 x 241 XAPA3100

Table 19.187: Drilled Insulated Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced Polyester [4]

Number of Number of Rows H x W Dimensions Catalog
Type Knockouts
Vertical Horizontal IN mm Number
22 mm
XAPA1100
NEMA 4, 4X, 13 1 1 1 3.35 X 5.75 85 X 146 XAPA1110
Usable depth 3.27 in. 2 1 2 3.35 X 5.75 85 X 146 XAPA1120
(83 mm) 1.58 in. (40 4 2 2 3.35 X 5.75 85 X 146 XAPA1104
mm) centerline 8 2 4 3.35 X 8.90 85 X 226 XAPA2108
spacing of holes
16 4 4 5.94 X 9.49 151 X 241 XAPA3116

XAPA1104

Table 19.188: Drilled Die Cast Enclosures (Painted Gray RAL7032) [5]
Usable Depth Number of H x W x D Dimensions
Type Material 22 mm Catalog Number
IN mm holes IN mm
NEMA 4, 13 2 3.15 x 3.15 x 2.03 80 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG19702
1.18 in. (30 mm) 1.93 49 3 5.12 x 3.15 x 2.03 130 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG29703
centerline Zinc 4 6.90 x 3.15 x 2.03 175 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG39704
spacing of holes
for horizontal mount 2.93 74.5 4 6.90 x 3.15 x 3.03 175 x 80 x 77 XAPG39804
1 3.15 x 3.15 x 2.03 80 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG19201
1.93 1.93 2 5.12 x 3.15 x 2.03 130 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG29202
NEMA 4, 13 3 6.90 x 3.15 x 2.03 175 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG39203
1.58 in. (40 mm) Zinc 1 3.15 x 3.15 x 3.03 80 x 80 x 77 XAPG19501
centerline
spacing of holes 2 5.12 x 3.15 x 3.03 130 x 80 x 77 XAPG29502
2.93 74.5
for vertical mount 3 6.90 x 3.15 x 3.03 175 x 80 x 77 XAPG39503
XAPG29703
4 8.66 x 3.15 x 3.03 220 x 80 x 77 XAPG49504
Aluminum 2.93 74.5 5 12.20 x 3.35 x 3.03 310 x 85 x 77 XAPG59505

Table 19.189: Drilled Flush Plates [6]

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Number of H x W x D Dimensions Catalog
Type Material
22 mm holes IN mm Number
1 2.83 x 2.83 72 x 72 XAPE301
NEMA 4, 13 2 4.13 x 2.83 105 x 72 XAPE302
1.18 in. (30 mm) Anodized
3 5.43 x 2.83 138 x 72 XAPE303
centerline spacing Aluminum
4 6.73 x 2.83 171 x 72 XAPE304

INTERFACE
of holes
5 8.03 x 2.83 204 x 72 XAPE305

XAPE302 XAPE303 Table 19.190: Optional Back Box (for finger protection, if required)
Type Material For Use With Catalog
Number
Flush plate XAPE301 XAPE901
Flush plate XAPE302 XAPE902
Protective rear covers Insulating Fiberglass Flush plate XAPE303 XAPE903
Flush plate XAPE304 XAPE904
Flush plate XAPE305 XAPE905

19

[4] Uses standard XB5 products from XB5 Complete Devices, page 19-24 through XB5 Accessories, page . Do not use ZENL style contact blocks.
[5] Can use either XB4 or XB5 products.
[6] Can use either XB4 or XB5 products.
19-73
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Control Stations and Enclosures 9001B Standard Duty Control Stations
Refer to Catalog 9001CT1104
www.se.com/us

9001B Standard Duty Control Stations

Table 19.191: Control Stations
For
Surface Stainless Watertight Hazardous
Steel Flush and Locations
No. of Nameplate Markings and Contact Mounting
NEMA1 Plate [8] Dusttight NEMA 7 &
Buttons Features Symbol [7] NEMA4 9 [9]
Type [10] Type [10] Type [10] Type [10]
Stop (Mushroom Button) 3 — — BW151 BR103
Stop (Lockout) 3 — — BW148 BR104
Off-On (Selector Switch) 19 BG111 — — —
Hand-Off-Auto (Selector
Switch) 17 BG112 — — —
Start-Stop 145 BG201 BF201 BW240 BR204
Start-Stop (Mushroom on
Stop) 145 BG203 — BW250 —
NEMA 1 Surface Mounting Type
BG201 NEMA 1 Flush Mounting (w/o Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop) 145 BG204 — BW241 BR204
pullbox) Type BF201
Forward-Reverse 146 BG206 — BW242 —
Open-Close 146 BG207 — BW244 —
Up-Down 146 BG208 — BW243 BR208
Raise-Lower 146 BG209 — — —
2 On-Off 145 — — BW245 —
On-Off 146 — BF211 — —
Universal (w/o legend
inserts) 25 BG214 — BW260 —
Start-Stop (Maintained
Contact) 10 BG215 — BW255 —
On -Off (Maintained Contact) 10 — — BW256 BR216
Universal (Maintained
contact w/o legend inserts) 10 — — — BR218
Forward-Reverse-Stop 109 BG302 — — —
NEMA 4 Type BW243 NEMA 7 and 9 Type BR103 Opn-Close-Stop 109 BG303 — — —
Up-Down-Stop 109 BG305 — — —
Start-Jog-Stop 109 BG316 — — —
Universal (w/o legend
inserts) 8 BG307 — — —
Start-Stop, Red Pilot Light: 145 & 121 BG308 — — —
120Vac/dc
For Replacement Interiors, see Replacement Interiors for Type B Standard Duty Push
Button Stations, page 19-75.
For Ratings, see Electrical Contact Ratings, page 19-75.
19
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

[7] See Replacement Interiors For Type B Standard Duty Push Button Stations , page 19-75.
[8] Uses standard 2.0 or 2.13 in. deep wall boxes, single gang for Types BF1 and BF2, two gang for Type BF3
[9] Also rated for Class l, Division l and ll, Groups B, C, or D; Class ll, Division l and ll, Groups E, F, or G
[10] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.
19-74
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Control Stations and Enclosures Control Stations and Enclosures
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1104
www.se.com/us

Replacement Parts for Type B Standard Duty Control Stations

NOTE: Contact block assemblies for all Type BG stations include cover and contact
block. Replacement contact block assemblies and terminal block wiring receptacles
for push buttons have provision for 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. circuit on each button. Unneeded
circuits need not be wired.
Table 19.192: Mounting Bracket
Description Catalog Number
C-Shaped Mounting Bracket for 9001BR Interior 3110112001

Type BGC214
(Type BGC contact block assemblies include cover.)

Type BGB214 BOC361

Table 19.193: Electrical Contact Ratings [11]

AC—NEMA B600 DC—NEMA P600

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Inductive Resistive
35% Power Factor 75% Power Factor Inductive and Resistive
Volts Make Break Continuous Make, Break and Volts
Make and Break Continuous
Carrying Continuous
A VA A VA Amperes Carrying Amperes
Amperes Carrying Amperes
120 30.5 3600 3.75 360 5 5
120 1.1 5

INTERFACE
240 15 3600 1.5 360 5 5
480 7.5 3600 .75 360 5 5 240 0.55 5
600 0.2 5
600 6 3600 .6 360 5 5

Contact Symbols

120 V Com

121

100
1 17

3 8 10 16 19 25 109 145 146 19

[11] OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.70, Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage of pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.
19-75
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Control Stations and Enclosures 30 mm Enclosures
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1104
www.se.com/us

9001KY and 9001SKY Control Stations

Table 19.194: Empty Enclosures (for Customer Assembly) [12]
UL Types 1, 3 and 13/ UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/ UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/
NEMA 1, 3, and 13 NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13 NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13

Sheet Steel Die Cast Zinc Stainless Steel (304) Polymeric (Plastic)
No of Holes
Type Type Type Type
1 KYAF1 KY1 KYSS1 SKY1
2 KYAF2 KY2 [13] KYSS2 SKY2
3 KYAF3 KY3 [13] KYSS3 SKY3
4 KYAF4 KY4 [13] KYSS4 SKY4
6 KYAF6 KY6 KYSS6 —
NOTE: See Assembled Control Stations , page 19-76
Table 19.195: Guarded Enclosures
UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/
NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13
Die Cast Zinc
No of Holes
Cover Color Box Color Type
1 Gray Gray KYG1 [14]
1 Yellow Gray KYG1Y [14]
NOTE: See Assembled Control Stations , page 19-76
KYG1Y
(mushroom head not included)

Table 19.196: Stainless Steel (302) NEMA 1 Flush Plates [15]

No of Holes Description Type
1 1 Hole flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K25
2 2 Hole flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K26
19

3 3 Hole flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K27

4 4 Hole flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K28
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

K26

Assembled 9001KY/SKY Control Stations

Table 19.197: Assembled Control Stations
No of Consists of
Operator Style and Features Type
Holes Enclosure Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates
UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13 Die Cast Zinc Enclosure [16]
Selector Switch (3 Pos Maintained) — KY1 KS43B KA1 Hand-Off-Auto
Selector Switch (2 Pos Maintained) — KY1 KS11B KA1 Off-On
Push Button (Momentary) KYK11 KY1 KR1B KA1 Start
Push Button (Momentary) — KY1 KR1R KA1 Stop
1
Mushroom Button (Momentary) KYK14 KY1 KR4R KA1 Stop
Push Button (with Lockout) — KY1 KR3R, K4 KA1 Stop
Break Glass Operator KYK116 KY1 K15 KA1 To Stop—Break Glass
Break Glass Operator (Red Enclosure) KYK117 KY1S1 K15 KA1 To Stop—Break Glass
2 Push Buttons (Lockout on Stop) — KY2 KR1B, KR3R, K4 KA1, KA1 Jog-Stop
2 Push Buttons KYK218 KY2 KR1B, KR3R KA1, KA1 On-Off
2 Push Buttons KYK26 KY2 KR1B, KR1B KA1, KA1 Open-Close
2 Push Buttons KYK25 KY2 KR1B, KR1B KA1, KA1 Up-Down
Type KYK31 2 2 Push Buttons KYK21 KY2 KR1B, KR3R KA1, KA1 Start-Stop
2 Push Buttons (with Sealed Contacts) [17] — KY2 KR1B, KR3R KA51, KA51 Start-Stop
2 Push Buttons (Lockout on Stop) KYK23 KY2 KR1B, KR3R, K4 KA1, KA1 Start-Stop
2 Push Buttons (Maintained/Interlocked) KYK27 KY2 KR11GR KA1 Start-Stop
1 Push Button, 1 Mushroom Button — KY2 KR1B, KR4R KA1, KA1 Start-Stop

[12] When ordering, add prefix 9001 to the catalog number.

[13] Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.
[14] Includes 1” NPT threaded conduit opening.
[15] To be used with a standard 2 x 3 in. general purpose switch box. A 2.5 in. deep switch box should be used if two Type KA contact blocks are mounted side by side. If two Type KA contact
blocks are mounted in tandem, a 3.5 in. deep box should be used.
[16] Uses 9001K metal operators and metal legend plates.
[17] Control Station consists of components that are UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, or D.
19-76
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 30 mm Enclosures Control Stations and Enclosures
Class 9001 / Refer to Catalog 9001CT1104
www.se.com/us

Table 19.197 Assembled Control Stations (cont'd.)

No of Consists of
Operator Style and Features Type
Holes Enclosure Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates
3 Push Buttons KYK31 KY3 KR1B, KR1B, KR3R KA1, KA1, KA1 Forward; Reverse; Stop
3 Push Buttons (Lockout on Stop) — KY3 KR1B, KR1B, KR3R, K4 KA1, KA1, KA1 Forward; Reverse; Stop
3 Push Buttons (With Sealed Contacts & Lockout on KA51, KA51,
Stop) [18] — KY3 KR1B, KR1B, KR3R, K4 Forward; Reverse; Stop
KA51
3 KR1B, KR1B, KR3R KA1, KA1, KA1 Open; Close; Stop
3 Push Buttons KYK33 KY3
Red 120v Pilot Light, 2 Push Buttons KYK317 KY3 KP1R31, KR1B, KR3R KA2, KA3 Start; Stop
3 Push Buttons KYK32 KY3 KR1B, KR1B, KR3R KA1, KA1, KA1 Up; Down; Stop
3 Push Buttons (Lockout on Stop) — KY3 KR1B, KR1B, KR3R, K4 KA1, KA1, KA1 Up ; Down; Stop
UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13—Stainless Steel (304) [19]
Push Button (Momentary) KYSS101 KYSS1 KR1B KA1 Start
Push Button (Momentary) — KYSS1 KR1B KA3 Stop
1
Selector Switch (2 Pos Maintained) — KYSS1 KS11B KA1 Off-On
Selector Switch (3 Pos Maintained) KYSS111 KYSS1 KS43B KA1 Hand-Off-Auto
2 Push Buttons KYSS201 KYSS2 KR1B, KR3R KA1, KA3 Start; Stop
Type
KYSS300 2 Push Buttons (Lockout on Stop) — KYSS2 KR1B, KR3R, K5 KA1, KA3 Start; Stop
2
2 Push Buttons (Maintained with Interlock) — KYSS2 KR11U KA1, KA1 Start; Stop
2 Push Buttons — KYSS2 KR1B, KR1B KA1, KA1 Up; Down
UL Types 1, 3, 4. 4X and 13/NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13—Stainless Steel (304) [20]
Push Button (Momentary) — KYSS1 SKR1B KA1 Start
Push Button (Momentary) KYSK103 KYSS1 SKR3R KA3 Stop
1
Selector Switch (2 Pos Maintained) — KYSS1 SKS11B KA1 Off-On
Selector Switch (3 Pos Maintained) KYSK111 KYSS1 SKS43B KA1 Hand-Off-Auto
2 Push Buttons KYSK201 KYSS2 SKR1B, SKR3R KA1, KA3 Start; Stop
2 Push Buttons (Lockout on Stop) — KYSS2 SKR1B, SKR3R, K5 KA1, KA3 Start; Stop
2
2 Push Buttons (Maintained with Interlock) — KYSS2 SKR11U KA1, KA1 Start; Stop
2 Push Buttons — KYSS2 SKR1B, SKR1B KA1, KA1 Up; Down
UL Types 1, 3, 4. 4X and 13/NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13—Polymeric (Plastic) [20]
Selector Switch (3 Pos Maintained) SKY111 SKY1 SKS43B KA1 Hand-Off-Auto
Type SKY201
Selector Switch (2 Pos Maintained) — SKY1 SKS11B KA1 Off-On
Selector Switch (2 Pos Maintained with Sealed
1 Contacts) [18] — SKY1 SKS11B KA51 Off-On
Push Button (with Lockout) SKY105 SKY1 SKR3R, K5 KA3 Stop
2 Push Buttons SKY201 SKY2 SKR1B, SKR3R KA1, KA3 Start-Stop
2 Push Buttons (Lockout on Stop) SKY203 SKY2 SKR1B, SKR1R, K5 KA1, KA3 Start-Stop
2 2 Push Buttons (With Sealed Contacts) [18] — SKY2 SKR1B, SKR3R KA51, KA51 Start-Stop
2 Push Buttons (With Sealed Contacts) [18] — SKY2 SKR1B, SKR3R KA51, KA51 On-Off
2 Push Buttons — SKY2 SKR1B, SKR1B KA1, KA1 Up-Down
3 Push Buttons SKY302 SKY3 SKR1B, SKR1B, SKR3R KA1, KA1, KA3 Up-Down-Stop
3 3 Push Buttons — SKY3 SKR1B, SKR1B, SKR3R KA1, KA1, KA3 Open-Close-Stop
Red 120v Pilot Light, 2 Push Buttons — SKY3 SKP1R31, SKR1B, SKR3R KA1, KA3 Start-Stop

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13 Die Cast Zinc Enclosures with Integral Guard
Guarded Enclosure (grey) with 120V Red LED Pilot
Light — KYG1 KP38LRR9 — order separately
Guarded Enclosure (grey) with 120V Green LED
Pilot Light — KYG1 KP38LGG9 — order separately
1
Guarded Enclosure (Yellow Cover) with Red Push- Push to Stop/

INTERFACE
KYG1Y1 [21] KYG1Y KR9R KA3
Type KYG1Y2 Pull Mushroom Pull to Start
Guarded Enclosure (Yellow Cover) with Red Turn-To KYG1Y2 [21] Emergency Stop
KYG1Y KR16 KA3
Release Mushroom

19

[18] Control Station consists of components that are UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, or D.
[19] Uses 9001K metal operators and plastic legend plates.
[20] Uses 9001SK plastic operators and plastic legend plates.
[21] Includes 1” NPT threaded conduit opening.
19-77
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Pendant Stations Wireless Remote Control System
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2140103EN
www.se.com/us

Harmony® eXLhoist

Remote Control Device Description

1 16 Front View
1 Rubber cover
2 Stop button
7 LED 2 (red)
2 3
5 3 4 LED 4 (red)
6 4 5 LED 1 (red)
6 LED 3 (red)
8 12
7 Top LED (red, green)
8 Button 1
9 Button 3
9 13
17 10 Button 5
11 Button 7–left start button
12 Button 2
10 14 13 Button 4
14 Button 6
15 Button 8–right start button
11 15 Rear View
16 Rubber protection cover
17 Battery pack

Front view of ZART8LS remote device

Rear view of remote device

1 6 9 Base Stataion
Front View
2
7 4 x Ø5 mm/0.20 in. holes for standard
1 mounting on a support
8 10
4 x screws to maintain the cover of the
5 14 2 receiver
12 2 x cable glands for cables Ø 6...13 mm/
3 0.25...0.50 in.
11
4 R5 R1 R2 R3 R4 Internal Board View
19

4 Stop relays
5 Relays R1 ...R4
6 Relay LEDs (red)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 Stop relay LED (red)
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

13 5 1 2 3 4 8 Power LED (yellow)

9 Radio module
10 Function button (cancel)
3
Internal board view of base station 11 Select button (OK)
Front view of base station Function LEDs (8 = red, 9 = yellow, 10 =
12
INTERFACE

green, 11 = orange)
13 Terminal block for input power
14 PLd (Performance Level d) status LED
Expansion Board View
15 Relays R6...R11
15
16 Relay LEDs (red)
17 Communication LED (green)
17
16
R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

6 7 8 9 10 11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

5 1 2 3 4

Expansion board view of base station

19-78
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Wireless Remote Control System Pendant Stations
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2140103EN
www.se.com/us

Remote Control Device and Base Station

Table 19.198: Remote Control Device
Characteristics Reference
Weight
Description Motion push Auxiliary push kg/lb
Standard MBC[1]
buttons buttons
With LEDs 6 1 ZART8LS — 0.300/0.661

Table 19.199: Base Station

ZARB10WS Characteristics Power Reference Weight
Description Supply (V) kg/lb
Outputs Inputs Standard MBC[1]
Wired connection 10 relays + 2 0.430/
cable gland safety relays — 48–240 ZARB10WS —
0.947
Wired connection
10 relays + 2 0.880/
(pre-wired with 1.5 safety relays — 48–240 ZARB10WSP —
ZART8LS m/4.92 ft cable) 1.940

Accessories
Table 19.200: Accessories
Description Characteristics Reference Weight kg/lb
Multi-charger power supply 6W, 5
Vdc /1.2 A (for ZARC702 Li-Ion 100–240 V power supply ZARC701 0.100/0.220
rechargeable battery only)
ZARC701 Li-Ion rechargeable battery with
ZARC703 battery table charger 83 x 46 mm/ 3.268 x 1.811 in. ZARC702 0.050/0.110
Battery pack for 3 x AAA (batteries
not included) 83 x 46 mm/ 3.268 x 1.811 in. ZARC704 0.020/0.044
Battery table charger, (for
ZARC702 Li-Ion rechargeable 5 Vdc power supply ZARC703 0.120/0.265
ZARC702 battery only)
ZARC705 Front label cover for ZART8LS
push buttons 120 x 60 mm/ 4.724 x 2.362 in. ZARC705 0.005/0.011
Rubber protection cover for Rubber material, black ZARC706 0.107/0.24
ZART8LS
Shoulder belt to support ZART8LS Nylon material, black ZARC707 0.130/0.29

ZARC707

ZARC706

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

19 INTERFACE

[1] MBC: Multi base control (tandem).

19-79
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Pendant Stations Wireless Remote Control System
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2140103EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.201: Transmitter — Pocket Remote

Description Battery Number of Reference Weight
Pushbuttons kg/lb
3 ZART03
4 ZART04
Single-step 2 x 1.5 V AAA/LR06
pushbutton Alkaline[2] 6 ZART06 0.135/0.298
8 ZART08
10 ZART10

ZARTxx + ZARB05WSP Table 19.202: Receiver — Pocket Remote

Description Relay outputs Power supply Reference Weight
V kg/lb
Wired connection 5 relays 12–24 ZARB05WSP
(pre-wired with 1.5 11 relays 12–24 ZARB11WSP 0.400/0.882
m/4.92 ft cable)

Table 19.203: Accessories — Pocket Remote

Description For use with Sold in lots Reference Weight
of [3] kg/lb
Customizable label kit for ZART03, ZART04, 1 ZARC620 0.135/0.298
remote transmitter66 x 114 ZART06, ZART08, [4]
mm/2.60 x 4.49 in. ZART10

ZARC620
19
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

[2] 2 batteries are included in packaging.

[3] Pack consists of 5 sheets of label kit.
[4] 1 polyester base layer for graphic printing, 1 set of unique legends.
19-80
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type BW Pendant Stations Pendant Stations
Refer to Catalog 9001CT1001
www.se.com/us

Type BW Pendant Stations and Accessories

This pre-assembled, two-button station now comes complete with internal and external
strain relief. Oversized finger grips on the rear of the enclosure make it easy to grip and
operate.
• Well suited for standard hoist applications
• Push button legend inserts
• Field-installable mushroom button
• Full cover gasket, to exclude harmful contaminants
Table 19.204: BW90 and BW100 Pendant Stations – with cord connector and strain relief
Enclosure Color Replacement Interior [5]
Legend Insert Mechanical Contact
Description Markings Symbol Contact
Interlock Yellow Red 9001 Type
Symbol
Up-Down Yes BW92Y — 146 BOC368 146
Forward-Reverse Yes BW93Y — 146 BOC368 146
On-Off [6] Yes BW94Y — 10 — 147
Start-Stop No BW95Y — 145 — 25
Start-Stop [6] Yes BW96Y — 10 — 147
Single Speed
On-Off [6] No — — 146 — 25
Up-Down Yes BW98Y — 100 — —
without Inserts Yes BW90YU — 147 — 25
without Inserts No BW91YU — 25 — 25
without Inserts [6] Yes — — 147 — 147
without Inserts Yes BW100YU BW100RU 150 — 150
Two Speed
BW90 / BW100 Up-Down Yes BW102Y — 150 — 150

Table 19.205: Hanger Brackets Table 19.207: Interchangeable Legend Inserts for Type BW Pendant Stations[7]
Marking Type
Description Form
Forward B255
Reverse B256
Up B253
External Bracket (cannot be
field installed) Y236 Down B254

Y236 Table 19.208: Replacement Enclosures

Description Color Type
Table 19.206: Strain Relief Replacement Yellow BWRY
Box & Cover
Red BWRR
Description Type with 4 screws
Black BWRB

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Strain Relief Replacement BWSR

BWSR

INTERFACE
Table 19.209: Electrical Contact Ratings [8]
AC—NEMA B600 DC—NEMA P600
Inductive Resistive
35% Power Factor 75% Power Factor Inductive and Resistive
Volts Make Break Continuous Make, Break and Volts
Continuous Make and Break Continuous
Carrying Carrying Amperes
A VA A VA Carrying Amperes Amperes
Amperes
120 30.5 3600 3.75 360 5 5 120 1.1 5
240 15 3600 1.5 360 5 5
480 7.5 3600 .75 360 5 5 240 0.55 5
600 0.2 5
600 6 3600 .6 360 5 5

Contact Symbols (Type BW Pendant Staions)

120 V Com Speed 1 19

121
Speed 2
100
1 17
Speed 1

Speed 2
3 8 10 16 19 25 109 145 146 147 150

[5] Includes gasket

[6] Maintained Contact
[7] Order must specify a quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
[8] OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.70, Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage of pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.
19-81
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Pendant Stations XAC Standard Duty Pistol Grips,
Enclosures, Contact Blocks
Refer to Catalog 9001CT1001 www.se.com/us

XAC Pistol Grip Stations and General Purpose Pendants

XAC pendant stations are designed for standard- or medium-duty control circuit
applications.
• Single- or two-speed versions
• Double insulated
• Shock and corrosion resistant
• 2, 4, 6, 8, 12 element versions
• Ease of operation
Table 19.210: Pistol Grip Stations
Function
Description Speeds Catalog Number
1 speed 2 speed
1 N.O. contact per operator
2 Mechanically interlocked operators 1 XACA201 [9]

2 N.O. (staggered) contacts per

operator 2 XACA207 [9]
2 Mechanically interlocked operators
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
2 Mechanically interlocked operators 1 XACA205 [9]

1 N.O. contact per direction

1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way XACD21A0101
XACA201 1 [10]
toggle
NOTE: Legends are required to achieve NEMA4 rating.

Table 19.211: General Purpose Pendants[11][12]

Enclosures Catalog Number
2 hole enclosure XACA02H7
3 hole enclosure XACA03H7
4 hole enclosure XACA04H7
6 hole enclosure XACA06H7
8 hole enclosure XACA08H7
12 hole enclosure XACA12H7

To place a custom pendant order, use the worksheet Type XACA Worksheet, page 19-83 as a guide. Orders
must be placed through the Product Selector in Quote to Cash. There is a 10% charge for assembly.

XACA03 with operators

19

XACA06

XAC Contact Blocks

Table 19.212: Contact Blocks for Operators in Cover
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Description Wiring Diagram Catalog Number

1 N.O./spring return/1 speed — ZB2BE101
1 N.C./spring return/1 speed — ZB2BE102
1 N.O. early close & 1 N.C. & 1 N.O./spring return/2 Figure 1
speed XENG1191
INTERFACE

1 N.C. & 2 N.O./spring return/1 speed Figure 2 XENG1491

1 N.O. & 1 N.O. latching/1 speed/interlocked Figure 3 XENG3781
ZB2BE10 XENG37 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. latching/1 speed/interlocked Figure 4 XENG3791
3 N.C.—all direct acting Figure 5 XENT1192

Table 19.213: Contact Blocks for Operators in Base of Enclosure [13]

Description Catalog Number
1 N.O./1 speed XACS101
1 N.C./1 speed XACS102
2 N.C./1 speed XACS104
Wiring Diagrams
XENG1191 XACS10

13 14 13 14
21 22 21 22 N/C + N/C + N/C
11

21

31

13 14 13 14 13 14 with positive
33 34 11 12 opening operation
12

22

32

33 34
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5

[9] These units are available with factory installed E-stops. Add a “3” to the end of the catalog number for standard E-stop or add a “4” for a trigger
action E-stop.
[10] These units are available with a factory installed E-stop. Use XACD22 ••• for a standard E-stop or XACD24••• for a trigger action E-stop.
[11] Standard enclosures include internal mounting plate, cable sleeve for 8 to 26 mm, internal cable clamp, suspension ring and cable tie.
[12] For ordering information on custom built XACA pendants, visit our website at www.Schneider-Electric.us.
[13] Cannot be used with XACA03 pendant.
19-82
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Type XACA Worksheet Pendant Stations
Refer to Catalog 9001CT1001
www.se.com/us

Type XACA Worksheet

Use this worksheet to assist in component selection. Custom orders for XACA pendant stations must
be placed through the Product Selector in Quote to Cash. There is a 10% charge for assembly.

XACA Order Guide Instructions

Custom built pendant stations
14
1. Determine the number of operators needed, then choose an enclosure with a corresponding number of holes.
2. Select the type of operator, contact block, and appropriate nameplate for each function required.
3. Check for special functions that may be required. These items could include mechanical interlocks, adapters for self-supporting
cable, lower support rings, protective guards, etc.

Catalog number
of enclosure
XACA
Mechanical interlock
1 Push button
Functions (draw a vertical line Contact blocks and
2
Legends Pilot light or
(optional) between the 2 units to pilot light bodies
Blanking plug
3 be interlocked )
4
5 1
6
7
2
8
9
10 3
11
12
4

5
13
6

15 7

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

8
16

INTERFACE
10
17

11

12

Mechanical Interlock
Mechanical interlock XACA009 Number of XACA009 required
(XACA009)

19
1 1 1
Unit mounted in base of station (facing downwards)
2 2
2 13

3
3 3 Attachments
4 4 4
Position Type Catalog No.
14 Adapters for self-supporting cable type BBAP (available only with cable sleeve Ø8–26 mm) XACB961
5 5 5
15 Lower support ring XACA971
6 6 6 16 Protective guard for base mounted selector switch or 40 mm emergency-stop push button XACA982

Possible Impossible 17 Protective guard for key switch XACA983

Combinations Combinations

19-83
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons XVB—70 mm Diameter (2.75 inches)
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

XVB 70 mm Diameter Beacons

Table 19.214: XVB Beacons with Steady Light
Description Light Source and Voltage Color Catalog Number
Green XVBL33
Complete unit, includes: Bulb (10 W max) Red XVBL34
not included Amber XVBL35
1 lens unit
1 base unit (direct or 250 V max
(must order bulb separately Blue XVBL36
tube mounting) Clear XVBL37
[1])
Yellow XVBL38

Table 19.215: XVB Beacons with Flashing Light (one flash per second)
Description Light Source and Voltage Color Catalog Number
Bulb (10 W max) Green XVBL4B3
not included Red XVBL4B4
XVBL3• XVBL4B• 24 Vac
24–48 Vdc
Complete unit, includes: (must order bulb separately Amber XVBL4B5
1 lens unit [1])
1 base unit (direct or
tube mounting) Bulb (10 W max) Red XVBL4M4
not included Amber XVBL4M5
48–230 Vac
(must order bulb separately Yellow XVBL4M8
[1])

Table 19.216: XVB Beacons with 10 Joule Strobe (2.75 in./70 mm diameter) [2]
Description Light Source and Voltage Color Catalog Number [3]
Red XVBL8B4
Strobe Amber XVBL8B5
24 Vac/Vdc Blue XVBL8B6
Complete unit, includes: (includes bulb) Clear XVBL8B7
1 lens unit
1 base unit (direct or Yellow XVBL8B8
tube mounting) Red XVBL8G4
Strobe Amber XVBL8G5
120 Vac
(includes bulb) Blue XVBL8G6
Yellow XVBL8G8
NOTE: There are no replacement lenses for strobes.
19

XVBL6B• XVBL8B•
5 Joule 10 Joule
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

[1] For bulbs, see XVB Accessories, page 19-86.

[2] Important: Discharge tube elements are not suitable for continuous-operation signaling due to temperature rise caused by the discharge tube.
[3] For 5 Joule units, specify XVBL6••, instead of XVBL8••.
19-84
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XVB—70 mm Diameter (2.75 inches) Tower Lights and Beacons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

XVB 70 mm Components
Table 19.217: XVB Lens Units for Steady Light
Light Source and
Description Voltage Color Catalog Number
Green XVBC33
Bulb (10 W max) Red XVBC34
not included Orange XVBC35
Illuminated lens unit 250 Vac/Vdc max
(must order bulb Blue XVBC36
XVBC8 separately [4]) Clear XVBC37
XVBC081 Yellow XVBC38

Table 19.218: XVB Lens Unit for Flashing Light

Light Source and
Description Voltage Color Catalog Number
Bulb (10 W max) Green XVBC4B3
not included Red XVBC4B4
XVBC 24 Vac Orange
24–48 Vdc XVBC4B5
(must order bulb Blue XVBC4B6
separately [4]) Yellow XVBC4B8
Illuminated lens unit
Bulb (10 W max) Green XVBC4M3
not included Red XVBC4M4
48–230 Vac Orange XVBC4M5
(must order bulb Blue XVBC4M6
XVBC9 separately [4])
Yellow XVBC4M8
NOTE: There are no replacement lenses units for the XVBC8•• strobes.
XVBCY2 Table 19.219: XVB Lens Units with 10 Joule Strobe
Light Source and
Description Voltage Color Catalog Number [5]
XVBC1
XVBC07 Red XVBC8B4
Strobe Orange XVBC8B5
XVBC23 24 Vac/Vdc Blue XVBC8B6
(includes bulb) Clear XVBC8B7
XVBC081 + Lens unti with integral
XVBC07 = Yellow XVBC8B8
10 Joule strobe
Red XVBC8G4
XVBC21 Strobe Orange
XVBC22 120 Vac
XVBC8G5
(includes bulb) Blue XVBC8G6
Yellow XVBC8G8
XVBZ0
Table 19.220: Audible Sounder Units
Description Supply Voltage Catalog Number
Sounder unit
12–48 Vac/Vdc XVBC9B
90 dB at 1 m
Adjustable from 75–90 dB
120–230 Vac XVBC9M
Continuous or intermittent modes

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.221: Base Units + Cover
Description Catalog Number
XVBC12 Base unit + cover
for direct or tube mounting, bottom or side cable entry XVBC21
(includes gasket)

19 INTERFACE

[4] For bulbs, see XVB Accessories, page 19-86.

[5] For 5 Joule units, specify XVBC6••, instead of XVBC8••
19-85
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons XVB—70 mm Diameter (2.75 inches)
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

XVB 70 mm Accessories
Table 19.222: XVB Accessories
Characteristics Catalog Number
Description
in. mm
Black tube with 4.72 120 XVBZ02 XVBZ02A [6]
integral black plastic 15.75 400 XVBZ03 —
mounting base
(includes gasket) 31.50 800 XVBZ04 —
Support tube XVBC020
concealment cover 3.94 100
Incandescent bulbs 24 Vac/Vdc DL1BLB
bayonet type BA 120 Vac/Vdc DL1BLG
15d, 10 Watts 230 Vac/Vdc DL1BLM
Incandescent bulbs 24 Vac/Vdc DL1BEB
bayonet type BA 120 Vac/Vdc DL1BEG
15d, 7 Watts 230 Vac/Vdc DL1BEM
White DL1BDB1
Green DL1BDB3
XVBZ0• Red DL1BDB4
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue DL1BDB6
Steady-On LED Yellow DL1BDB8
bulbs Amber DL1BDB5
bayonet type BA 15d White DL1BDG1
(sold as single) [7] Green DL1BDG3
Red DL1BDG4
120 Vac
Blue DL1BDG6
Yellow DL1BDG8
Amber DL1BDG5
White DL1BKB1
Green DL1BKB3
24 Vac/Vdc
Flashing LED bulbs Red DL1BKB4
Amber DL1BKB5
120 Vac Red DL1BKG4
Adapter for side With CM12 (p. 13.5) cable gland, for cable
XVBC020 entry through base size of 0.4 to 0.55 in. (10 to 14 mm) diameter XVBC14
unit
Conduit adapter 1/2 in. NPT (for customer supplied tubing) XVBC00

Wiring Diagrams, Base Units

Screw terminals 2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm2)

XVBC12 Torque to 4.4 in-lb (0.5 N•m) 1 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) 5

4
19

5 3
4
3
2
2
1 1
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

1
C C
1
INTERFACE

XVBL XVBC

[6] Aluminum tube.

[7] For 240 Vac, replace the B or G in the catalog number with M—for example, DL1BDM1. For flashing LEDs, refer to catalog 9001CT0001.
19-86
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XVC, 40 mm, 60 mm, and 100 mm Diameter Tower Lights and Beacons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

XVC Tower Lights and Accessories

Table 19.223: XVC4 Tower Lights — 40 mm diameter (1.5 inches)
Light source Signaling colors [8] Catalog
Description Voltage
(included) Steady Flashing Number
With support tube mounting
R – XVC4B1
R, O – XVC4B2
24 Vdc R, O, G – XVC4B3
LED for steady
Without buzzer light only R, O, G, B – XVC4B4
R, O, G, B, C – XVC4B5
100-240 R, O, G
Vac – XVC4M3
R R XVC4B15S
R, O R, O XVC4B25S
24 Vdc R, O, G R, O, G XVC4B35S
With buzzer LED for steady or
+ flashing light flashing light [9] R, O, G, B R, O, G, B XVC4B45S
R, O, G, B, C R, O, G, B, C XVC4B55S
100-240 R R XVC4M15S
Vac R, O, G R, O, G XVC4M35S
For base mounting
R – XVC4B1K
R, O – XVC4B2K
LED for steady R, O, G
Without buzzer light only 24 Vdc – XVC4B3K
R, O, G, B – XVC4B4K
R, O, G, B, C – XVC4B5K
XVC4B35S
XVC4B5
Table 19.224: Accessories for XVC4
Description Diameter Minimum height to be added Catalog Number
mm mm
Die-cast metal mounting
base (for use with XVC4••
and XVC4••5S with support 90 32 XVCZ11
tube)

XVCZ11
Table 19.225: XVC Tower Lights — 100 mm diameter (4 inches)
Light source Voltage Signaling colors [8] Catalog
Description (included) Vdc Steady Flashing Number
For base mounting
R R XVC1B1K
24
Without buzzer LED for steady or R, O, G R, O, G XVC1B3K
With flashing light flashing light [9] 100-240 R, O, G R, O, G XVC1M3K
Vac R, O, G, B, C R, O, G, B, C XVC1M5K
With buzzer LED for steady or
+ flashing light flashing light [9] 24 R, O, G R, O, G XVC1B3SK

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

Table 19.226: Accessories for XVC1
Description Diameter Height Catalog Number
mm mm
Mount tube and base 140 300 XVCZ13

INTERFACE
L-shape mount bracket — — XVCZ23

XVC1B5K
XVC1B5SK XVCZ13

19
XVCZ23

[8] Signaling colors: R = Red, G = Green, O = Orange, B = Blue, C = Clear. The colors are listed in the mounting order of the illuminated units from top to bottom.
[9] Flashing light function selected by wiring or programming.
19-87
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons XVC, 40 mm, 60 mm, and 100 mm Diameter
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

Table 19.227: XVC6 Tower Lights, 60 mm diameter (2.375 inches)

Light source Signaling colors [10] Catalog
Description Voltage
(included) Steady Flashing Number
With support tube mounting
R – XVC6B1
R, O, G – XVC6B3
24 Vdc
LED for steady R, O, G, B – XVC6B4
Without buzzer light only R, O, G, B, C – XVC6B5
100-240 R, O, G – XVC6M3
Vac R, O, G, B – XVC6M4
24 Vdc R, O, G R, O, G XVC6B35S
R, O, G, B R, O, G, B XVC6B45S
With buzzer LED for steady or R, O, G, B, C R, O, G, B, C XVC6B55S
+ flashing light flashing light [11] R R XVC6M15S
100-240 R, O, G R, O, G XVC6M35S
Vac
R, O, G, B R, O, G, B XVC 6M45S
For base mounting
24 Vdc R, O, G – XVC6B3K
LED for steady
Without buzzer light only 100-240 R, O, G – XVC6M3K
Vac
R R XVC6B15SK
XVC6B5K XVC6B55SK
R, O R, O XVC6B25SK
24 Vdc R, O, G R, O, G XVC 6B35SK
R, O, G, B R, O, G, B XVC6B45SK
With buzzer LED for steady or
+ flashing light flashing light [11] R, O, G, B, C R, O, G, B, C XVC6B55SK
R R XVC6M15SK
100-240 R, O, G R, O, G XVC6M35SK
Vac R, O, G, B R, O, G, B XVC6M45SK
R, O, G, B, C R, O, G, B, C XVC6M55SK

Table 19.228: Accessories for XVC6

Diame- Minimum height to be
Description ter added Catalog Number
mm mm
Die-cast metal mounting base
for XVC6B• and XVC6B•5S with 100 30 XVCZ02
support tube.
XVCZ12 Stamped metal mounting base for
XVCZ02 84 21.6 XVCZ12
XVC6B• K and XVC6B•5SK
19
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

[10] Signaling colors: R = Red, G = Green, O = Orange, B = Blue, C = Clear. The colors are listed in the mounting order of the illuminated units from
top to bottom.
[11] Flashing light function selected by wiring or programming.
19-88
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Signaling Units Tower Lights and Beacons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

Tower Lights For Customer Assembly (up to 5 units)

Tower Lights
1 The XVU tower lights are customer assembled products comprising:
1 Top cover (black or silver)
2 Buzzer unit (black or silver)[12]
3 Illuminated units:[13]
LED illuminated units with steady or blinking light signaling (colors: green, red, orange,blue, white, or
3.1 yellow)
2
Multi-color LED unit (colors: green, red, orange, blue, white, or yellow. Patterns: steady, blinking, flashing,
3.2 or rotating)
Pulse signal multi-color LED unit (colors: green, red, orange, or blue. Patterns: steady, blinking, flashing,
3.3 or rotating) [14][15]
4 Sound units
4.1 Sound unit
4.2 Sound unit, plus signal [15]
3
5 Extender unit (black or silver)
6 Base unit, DC (black or silver)
7 Base unit, AC (black or silver)
8 Flexible mounting unit
9 Direct mounting plate (black or silver)
100 mm/3 .927 in., 400 mm/15.748 in., or 800 mm/31.496 in. pole with integrated mounting plate (black or
10 silver for 100 mm pole, and black for 400 mm and 800 mm pole)
4 11 Adjustable height pole from 210 to 385 mm/8.268 to 15.157 in.[16] with integrated mounting plate
12 100 mm/3.927 in., 250 mm/9.842 in., or 400 mm/15.748 in. pole with metal bracket (black)
13 Mounting plate for use on vertical support (black)[17]
14 ½” NPT conduit adapter for customer supplied tubing

Composition
• XVU tower lights are customer assembled signaling units that are mounted vertically
or horizontally with the support of a mounting accessory.
• Maximum of 5 illuminated units or 4 illuminated units with 1 audible unit can be
5 assembled. The illuminated or audible unit[18], stack vertically.
• With the indicator marks on these units they can be easily assembled.
• Electrical connections between each unit are made automatically as they are
mechanically assembled.
• The signaling units are identical in size and their positioning is unrestricted.
Mounting
• Horizontal mounting: Fixed into support panel with direct mounting plate, poles or
adjustable height pole with integrated mounting plate
• Vertical mounting: Fixed into support panel with mounting plate using pole with metal
bracket or mounting plate for use on vertical support

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

• Horizontal or vertical mounting: Fixed into support panel with mounting plate using
flexible mounting unit
6 7
• Mounting plate with aluminium 1/2” NPT adapter.
Cabling

INTERFACE
By means of spring cage connection terminal block incorporated in mounting unit (Direct
mounting plate, pole with plate, adjustment pole)

8
11

10 12
19
9
14

13

[12] Always mounted on the top .

[13] Up to 5 LED illuminated units without sound unit; Up to 4 LED illuminated units with sound unit .
[14] Pulse signal multi-color LED unit cannot be combined with standard sound unit (XVUC9V).
[15] Up to 4 illuminated and sound units when pulse signal technology is used.
[16] Only for DC body unit.
[17] Compatible with XVUZ02, XVUZ02Q, XVUZ03, XVUZ400, XVUZ800, and XVUZ05.
[18] Sound unit cannot be combined with buzzer unit at the same time.
19-89
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons Signaling Units
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

Illuminated Units, High Flash LED Units

Illuminated LED Units: IP 65
Signaling Characteristics
Description Color Reference Weight kg/lb
Type Voltage Power
24 V 2.5 W Green XVUC23 0.064/0.141
24 V 2.0 W Red XVUC24 0.064/0.141
24 V 2.0 W Orange XVUC25 0.064/0.141
Steady
24 V 2.5 W Blue XVUC26 0.064/0.141
24 V 2.5 W White XVUC27 0.064/0.141
High 24 V 2.5 W Yellow XVUC28 0.064/0.141
brightness
XVUC23 LED Units 24 V 1.2 W Green XVUC43 0.064/0.141
XVUC43 24 V 0.9 W Red XVUC44 0.064/0.141
24 V 0.9 W Orange XVUC45 0.064/0.141
Blinking
24 V 1.2 W Blue XVUC46 0.064/0.141
24 V 1.2 W White XVUC47 0.064/0.141
24 V 1.2 W Yellow XVUC48 0.064/0.141
Steady/ Multi-color
(green, red,
Multi-color blinking/
flashing/ 24 V 1.5 W orange, blue, XVUC29 0.064/0.141
LED unit white, and
rotating yellow)
Steady/ Multi-color
XVUC24 Pulse signal blinking/ (green, red,
XVUC44 Multi-color flashing/ 24 V 1.7 W orange, and XVUC29P 0.069/0.152
LED unit [19] rotating blue)

XVUC25
XVUC45

XVUC6
XVUC46
19
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

XVUC27
XVUC47
INTERFACE

XVUC28
XVUC48

XVUC29
XVUC29P

[19] 1 signal wire, 2 power wires. Adaptable for both NPN and PNP. Controlled by PLC dynamically.
19-90
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Signaling Units Tower Lights and Beacons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

Audible and Base Units

Audible Units: IP 54
Characteristics
Description Color Reference Weight kg/lb
Voltage Power
Buzzer, adjustable 70...85 dB at Black XVUC9S 0.077/0.170
1 m/3.281 ft
(4 configurations of audible 24 V 1.7 W
Silver XVUC9SQ 0.077/0.170
signal)
Sound, adjustable 0...86 dB at
1m/3.281 ft 24 V 1.7 W Black XVUC9V 0.217/0.480
(4 channels)
Sound unit, pulse signal 0...86 dB
XVUC9S at 1m/3.281 ft (16 channels)[20] 24 V 4.1 W Black XVUC9VP 0.219/0.483

Base Units: IP 65
Description Voltage Color Reference Weight kg/lb
Black XVUC21B 0.110/0.243
24 Vac/Vdc
Silver XVUC21BQ 0.110/0.243
Base unit with top XVUC21M
cover[21] Black [22] 0.235/0.518
100 to 240 Vac
XVUC21MP
Black [23] 0.235/0.518

XVUC9SQ

XVUC9V

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

INTERFACE
XVUC21BQ

19

XVUC21M

[20] 1 signal wire, 2 power wires. Adaptable for both NPN and PNP. 16 channels can be controlled by PLC.
[21] Direct mounting plate XVUZ01● needed for direct mounting.
[22] NPN type.
[23] PNP type.
19-91
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons Signaling Units
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

Accessories
Accessories
Height of
Description Voltage aluminum Color Reference Weight kg/lb
pole mm/in.
Body extender 24 Vac/Vdc — Black XVUC020 0.093/0.205
XVUZ01
[24] 0.063/0.139
XVUZ03
Black [25] 0.063/0.139
Direct Mounting Plate —
XVUZ04
[26] 0.063/0.139
XVUZ01Q
Silver [25] 0.063/0.139
100/3.927 Black XVUZ02 0.132/0.291
Mounting plate with aluminum 100/3.927 Silver XVUZ02Q 0.132/0.291
XVUC020 pole 400/15.748 Black XVUZ400 0.236/0.520
800/31.496 Black XVUZ800 0.430/0.945
Mounting plate with adjustable 210 to 385/
height aluminum pole[27] 8.268 to Black XVUZ05 0.253/0.558
15.157
Flexible mounting unit for use on
horizontal or vertical support, IP — Black XVUZ06 0.193/0.425
55
100/3.927 Black XVUZ100T 0.220/0.485
Metal bracket with aluminum
pole, IP42 250/9.842 Black XVUZ250T 0.240/0.529
XVUZ01Q 400/15.74 Black XVUZ400T 0.320/0.705
Mounting plate for use on vertical
support — Black XVUZ12 0.360/0.794
Mounting plate with aluminium 1/
2” NPT adapter — Black XVUZ00 0.095/0.209
19

XVUZ400 XVUZ05
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

XVUZ06

XVUZ100T

XVUZ12
XVUZ00

[24] Three-pin mounting.

[25] Two-pin mounting.
[26] Four-pin mounting.
[27] Only for use with DC body unit.
19-92
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XVR Pre-Wired Rotating Mirror Beacons Tower Lights and Beacons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

XVR Pre-Wired Beacons and Accessories

Table 19.229: XVR Pre-Wired Rotating Mirror Beacons
Diameter (mm) Sound Option Enclosure Rating Voltage Color Catalog
Number
Red XVR08B04
IP 23 Orange XVR08B05
Ø 84 Without buzzer (IP 65 with 24 Vac/Vdc
accessories) Green XVR08B03
Blue XVR08B06
IP 23 Red XVR10B04
Ø 106 Without buzzer (IP 55 with 24 Vac/Vdc
accessories) Orange XVR10B05
Red XVR12B04
XVR 08••• XVR 10••• Ø 120 Without buzzer IP 23 24 Vac/Vdc Orange XVR12B05
Blue XVR12B06
Red XVR12B04S
Ø 120 With buzzer IP 23 24 Vac/Vdc Orange XVR12B05S
Blue XVR12B06S
IP 23 Red XVR13B04
Ø 130 Without buzzer Resistant to 24 Vdc
vibration Orange XVR13B05

XVR 12••• XVR 13•••

Table 19.230: XVR Accessories

Description Diameter (mm) Height (mm) Catalog
Number
Rubber base
to increase the IP degree of protection 84 — XVRZ081

Mount tube and base 106, 120 and 300 XVCZ13

130
L-shape mounting bracket 84, 106 and 120 — XVCZ23

XVR Z081

XVC Z13

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

XVC Z23

19 INTERFACE

19-93
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Tower Lights and Beacons XVR Pre-Wired Rotating Mirror Beacons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

XVR Complete Pre-Cabled Motor-Less Rotating/Flashing Beacons

Table 19.231: Complete, Pre-cabled Motor-less Rotating/Flashing Beacons
Diameter Sound IP Degree of Voltage Color Reference Weight
(Ø mm/in.) option Protection V Number (kg/lb)
Green XVR3B03
Red XVR3B04
12–24
Orange XVR3B05
IP 65 (upright) Blue XVR3B06
Without IP 23 (sideways, 0.484/1.067
buzzer inverted) Green XVR3M03
Red XVR3M04
100–230
Orange XVR3M05
Blue XVR3M06
XVR3B04S XVR3E06 12–24 Green XVR3B03S
IP 23 (upright, Red XVR3B04S
100/3.94 With buzzer sideways,
inverted) Orange XVR3B05S
Blue XVR3B06S
0.538/1.186
Green XVR3M03S
Red XVR3M04S
100–230
Orange XVR3M05S
IP 65 (upright Blue XVR3M06S
Without IP 23 (sideways,
buzzer inverted) Green XVR3E03
Red XVR3E04
48 0.484/1.067
Orange XVR3E05
Blue XVR3E06
19
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

19-94
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 XVS Sirens and Electronic Alarms Tower Lights and Beacons
Refer to Catalog DIA5ED2130801EN
www.se.com/us

XVS Sirens and Electronic Alarms

Table 19.232: XVS Sirens and Electronic Alarms
Description Voltage Color Catalog Number
Multisound siren
105 dB, 43 tones 12/24 Vdc White XVS14BMW
PNP, Black XVS72BMBP
Electronic alarms PNP, White XVS72BMWP
90 dB, 16 tones 12/24 Vac/Vdc
Panel Mount DIN72 NPN, Black XVS72BMBN
NPN, White XVS72BMWN

Table 19.233: XVS Dimensions (mm)

XVS 14BMW
XVS14BMW 223
XVS72BM
3xØ9

=
50
=
25 52

84

140

114
20°

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

97
120
XVS 72BMpp

INTERFACE
69,3
63,3
10,9 60,7 72
U 67,5

72
51

19
24

XVSV Editable Voice Alarms

Table 19.234: XVSV Editable Voice Alarms
Description Voltage Color Reference Weight
V kg/lb
NPN, Black XVSV7BBN
Editable alarms, NPN, White XVSV7BWN
12–24 0.142/0.313
DIN72
PNP, Black XVSV7BBP
NPN, Black XVSV9BBN
12–24 NPN, White XVSV9BWN 0.268/0.591
Editable alarms, PNP, Black XVSV9BBP
DIN96
NPN, Black XVSV9MBN
100–230 0.267/0.589
NPN, White XVSV9MWN
Wall mounting plate XVSZ016 0.148/0.326
for DIN72 and DIN96
XVSV7BBN and XVSV9MWN

19-95
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Foot Switches 9002A Heavy Duty Industrial
Class 9002
www.se.com/us

Heavy Duty Industrial Foot Switches—Oiltight, Watertight,

Dusttight and Driptight Enclosure, NEMA 2, 4 and 13

DANGER
HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS
Do not use foot switches on machines without point-of-operation protection.

9002AW2
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death, serious injury, or
Type AW Foot Switch with equipment damage.
Top Pedal Shield and Side
Shields 9002AW132
Type AW with Oversized
Pedal Shield and Side Shields
Foot Switch Selection
Foot switches are used to control many industrial processes, while leaving the operator's
hands free to perform other functions. The type or model of foot switch suitable for each
application will vary depending on factors such as the control function required, degree
of protection required, production methods, unusual conditions, government regulations,
etc. In some applications more than one foot switch may be required, as when two or
more persons are operating a machine. In these cases, safe practice and regulations
9002AW117 9002AW1
Type AW Foot Switch with Type AW Foot Switch require that the foot switches be wired in series making it necessary that each operator's
Oversized Pedal Shield, Side without Pedal Shield foot switch be actuated before the machine will cycle.
Shields and Safety Door
Only the user can be aware of all the conditions and factors present during setup,
operation and maintenance of the machine; therefore, only the user can determine which
foot switch(es) can be properly used. When selecting a foot switch for a particular
application, the user should refer to the applicable ANSI standards and OSHA
regulations. The National Safety Council's Accident Prevention Manual also provides
much useful information.
In some applications, such as power presses, additional operator protection such as
point-of-operation guarding must be provided when a foot switch is used as an actuator.
This is necessary since the operator's hands and other parts of the body are free to enter
the pinch point area and serious injury can occur. The shielding provided on foot
switches cannot protect an operator from injury. For this reason the foot switch cannot be
substituted for or take the place of point-of-operation protection.
A Trilingual Danger Sign regarding the need for point-of-operation protection is supplied
with each foot switch. The sign incorporates three languages: English, Spanish and
French. Additional copies of the sign are available by contacting your Square D sales
office.
19

Type AW Fully Shielded Foot Switch with Oversized Pedal Shield, Side Shields and
Safety Door. The Safety Door is interlocked with the pedal to prevent operation due to
shock or vibration. It prevents accidental pedal operation by requiring a simple but
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

intentional motion to lift the door before inserting the foot.

Operating Temperature:
–30 to +60 °C (–22 to +140 °F)
INTERFACE

9002AW124

19-96
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 9002A Heavy Duty Industrial Foot Switches
Class 9002
www.se.com/us

Table 19.235: Foot Switch Catalog Numbers [1]

Fully Shielded with
Oversized Pedal With Oversized
With Pedal UNSHIELDED
Shield, Pedal Shield Shield and
Description Features Side Shields and and (See Warning note[2])
Side Shields Side Shields
Safety Door
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Single Pole[3] Spring Return AW117 AW132 AW2 AW1
Double Throw With Mechanical Latch — — AW7 —
Two Pole [3] Spring Return AW124 [4] AW133 AW14 AW13
Double Throw With Mechanical Latch — — AW15 —
Two Stage [3] Spring Return AW119 AW134 AW5
(One Pole Each With Mechanical Latch in 1st Stage AW6
— — AW9 —
Stage) Table 1 With Mechanical Latch in 2nd Stage — — —
Four Stage [3]
(One Pole Each Spring Return AW123 — — AW21
Stage) Table 2
Single Pole
Single Throw Maintained Contact—Push On/Push Off — — AW12 AW11
Replacement
Cover Assembly — — — AC8 [5] —

File: E78403 File: LR25490

CCN: NKCR Class: 3211–03

For replacement parts for Class 9002 Type AW: See instruction bulletin 65013-010-31.
Also see Table 19.237 Contact Symbol—Two Stage, page 19-98 and Table 19.238 Contact Symbol—Four Stage,
page 19-98.
Approximate Dimensions
(5) .34 Dia. Mtg. Holes
9
(3) .34 Dia. Mtg. Holes
9
6.40
163
2.87 3.50
3.50 73 89
89 5.63
4.50 143
114

5.81 5.81 1.25

148 147 32
8.56 6.62 Typ.
216 168
11.13
283
3/4 14 Pipe Tap

2.94

PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR

75 6.26
159
5.73 2.90
146 74 .94
.38 .94 4.60 24 5.02
10 24 117 128

INTERFACE
Types AW1, AW5, AW11, AW13 and AW21 1.84
47
(5) .34 Dia. Mtg. Holes
9 8.56
217
3/4 14 Pipe Tap
Types AW117, AW119, AW123, AW124
5.38 3.50 Types AW132, AW133 and AW134 (without safety door)
137 89

1.44
37

19
4.84 .94
123 24

6.87
174
3/4-14 NPT
9.00
229
Types AW2, AW6, AW12, AW14 and AW22
Dual Dimensions: INCHES
Millimeters

[1] When ordering, add prefix “9002” to the catalog number.

[2] WARNING: These foot switches must not be used to operate machines or equipment where the possibility of operator injury exists. Typical uses include Emergency Stop functions, “Dead
Man” controls, signal functions (lights, bells, etc.).
[3] A single pole snap switch that contains two double break contact elements (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.) must be used on circuits of same polarity. A double pole snap switch contains two electrically
separated sets of contact elements allowing use on circuits of opposite polarity. Each set that contains two double break contact elements (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.) must be used on circuits of
same polarity.
[4] 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. isolated, direct acting contacts.
[5] For replacement cover drilled to accept latch. For Series C foot switches order AC9. No replacement cover available for Series A or B devices drilled to accept latch. AC8 is spring return
only.
19-97
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
 Foot Switches 9002A Heavy Duty Industrial
Class 9002
www.se.com/us

Table 19.236: Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts

AC Amperes DC Amperes
Inductive Resistive
Inductive
35% Power Factor 75% Power and Resistive
Type Volts Factor Volts
Make, Break Make and Break
Make Break and Single Double Continuous
Continuous Throw Throw
120 40 15 15
AW1 through AW09, 240 20 10 10 125 2.0 0.5 15
AW117, AW119, 250 0.5 0.2 15
AW132 480 10 6 6 600 0.1 0.02 15
600 8 5 5
120 30 3 3 125 1.0 0.2 10
AW13, AW14, AW15, AW133 240 15 1.5 1.5 250 0.3 0.1 10
480 7.5 0.75 0.75 600 0.1 — 10
600 6 0.6 0.6 — — — —
AW11, AW12 115 36 6 — 125 2.2 — —
230 18 3 — 250 1.1 — —
120 15.0 1.5 10 — — — —
AW21 240 7.5 0.75 10 — — — —
AW123 480 3.75 0.375 10 — — — —
600 3.0 0.3 10 — — — —
120 60 6 10 120 1.1 10
240 10 —
AW124 30 3 240 0.55 — 10
480 15 1.5 10 600 0.2 10
600 10 —
12 1.2
NOTE: Double throw switches are rated 250 Vdc maximum.

Table 19.237: Contact Symbol—Two Stage

Snap Switch Pedal
Unit Circuit Up Half Down Full Down
A1 0 1 1
1
B1 1 0 0
A2 1 1 0
2
B2 0 0 1
NOTE: 0 = Open 1 = Closed

Table 19.238: Contact Symbol—Four Stage

Snap Switch Pedal Position
Unit Circuit Up Down
1A1 0 0 1 1 1
1B1 1 1 0 0 0
1
2A1 0 1 1 1 1
2B1 1 0 0 0 0
1A2 1 1 1 0 0
1B2 0 0 0 1 1
2
2A2 1 1 1 1 0
2B2 0 0 0 0 1
19
PUSH BUTTONS AND OPERATOR
INTERFACE

19-98
© 2024 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved